WO2022174716A1 - 一种无线音频设备组件、通信方法及装置 - Google Patents

一种无线音频设备组件、通信方法及装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022174716A1
WO2022174716A1 PCT/CN2022/073001 CN2022073001W WO2022174716A1 WO 2022174716 A1 WO2022174716 A1 WO 2022174716A1 CN 2022073001 W CN2022073001 W CN 2022073001W WO 2022174716 A1 WO2022174716 A1 WO 2022174716A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
storage box
wireless audio
audio device
accessory
slot
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/073001
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
任慧超
杨斌
赵帅
黄洁静
司晓云
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202110351496.7A external-priority patent/CN114979905B/zh
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2022174716A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022174716A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04RLOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of terminal technologies, and in particular, to a wireless audio device component, a communication method, and an apparatus.
  • wireless audio devices such as true wireless stereo (TWS) earphones
  • TWS true wireless stereo
  • the user has to carry a storage box of the wireless audio device with him.
  • the present application provides a wireless audio device assembly, a communication method and a device, which are used to expand functions on a storage box and improve user experience.
  • the present application provides a wireless audio device assembly, which may include a storage box, a wireless audio device, and accessories.
  • the storage box includes a main body and a box cover, and the box cover can be covered with the main body, so as to realize the storage function of the storage box.
  • the body can be provided with a first slot and a second slot, the first slot can be set on the first surface of the storage box, and can be accommodated in the accommodating space formed by the box cover and the body cover.
  • the wireless audio device can be inserted into the first slot of the body of the storage box, so that the storage box can accommodate the wireless audio device.
  • the wireless audio device can also be communicatively connected with the storage box, thereby realizing information interaction between the wireless audio device and the storage box.
  • the accessory can be integrated with functional modules different from the wireless audio device and the storage box, and can realize the communication connection with the storage box.
  • the accessory is detachably inserted into the second slot, and is clamped and fixed with the main body.
  • at least part of the accessories may be exposed to the outside of the storage box.
  • both the accessories and the wireless audio device are connected in communication with the storage box.
  • the accessory can transmit sensor data, interactive control information, accessory ID and other information to the storage box.
  • the storage box After the storage box processes the data, it transmits the received information to the wireless audio device paired with it, or to an external terminal device through a communication module.
  • the data information of wireless audio equipment and external terminal equipment can also be processed through the storage box and then sent to accessories for processing. It can be seen that, in the present application, the function of the storage box is effectively expanded, which can improve the user experience.
  • the accessory may include a connected detection part and an installation part.
  • the detection unit may be provided with a module for realizing the function of an accessory, such as a sensor.
  • the installation part is used for the installation of the accessories and the storage box, wherein the installation part includes a connection part and a contact part, the contact part is connected with the detection part through the connection part, and the contact part is detachably inserted into the second slot, so as to realize the connection between the accessories and the detection part.
  • Removable connection for storage box In this way, the user can choose whether to carry the accessory according to his own needs, and replace the accessory, so as to improve the user's use experience.
  • first slot and the second slot are respectively used to store and install the wireless audio device and the accessories, in order to avoid mutual interference when the wireless audio device and the accessories are arranged in the storage box.
  • first slot position and the second slot position may be respectively arranged on different surfaces of the body.
  • the mounting portion of the accessory may be located on a side surface of the detection portion facing the body, so as to facilitate the mounting of the accessory and the storage box.
  • the storage box may further include a transmission mechanism.
  • the transmission mechanism is located in the housing of the storage box, and the transmission mechanism includes a connecting arm, a driving part and a clamping part.
  • One end of the connecting arm is fixedly connected to the box cover, the driving component is located between the connecting arm and the clamping component, and the clamping component is located on the side of the driving component away from the first surface and can abut with the end of the driving component. Since one end of the connecting edge is fixedly connected with the box cover, the connecting arm can rotate with the box cover, and the rotation direction of the connecting arm and the box cover is the same.
  • the driving component can also be driven to rotate, and the rotating direction of the driving component is opposite to the rotating direction of the connecting arm.
  • the engaging component can also be pushed to slide in a direction away from the first surface, so as to realize the transmission connection of the trigger mechanism.
  • the mounting portion when the mounting portion is inserted into the second slot, it can be clamped with the clamping member, so as to realize the clamping and fixing between the accessory and the storage box.
  • the other end of the connecting arm can be provided with a first abutting portion.
  • a second abutting portion is provided at one end of the driving member close to the connecting arm, and an end close to the clamping member is provided with a protrusion.
  • the second abutting portion is disposed close to the first surface relative to the first abutting portion, the protrusion protrudes from the surface of the driving member toward the side away from the first surface, and the clamping member abuts against the protrusion.
  • the first abutting part of the connecting arm moves toward the first surface, it can abut with the second abutting part, so as to push the driving part to rotate, so that the protrusion of the driving part can move in a direction away from the first surface move, and push the snap-fitting part to slide in a direction away from the first surface.
  • a chute can also be provided inside the housing.
  • the second slot may include an opening opened in the housing, and the chute may be disposed close to the opening of the housing, so that the opening communicates with the chute.
  • the clamping part can slide in the sliding groove in a direction toward or away from the first surface, so that the sliding groove provides a guiding function for the movement of the clamping part, which is beneficial to improve the sliding stability of the sliding groove.
  • the sliding of the snap-connecting member along the chute toward the first surface can be realized by an elastic member.
  • the elastic member may be disposed in the chute, located on the side of the engaging member away from the first surface, and elastically abutted with the engaging member. In this way, when the driving member pushes the engaging member to slide to the side away from the first surface, the elastic member accumulates elastic force.
  • the elastic part pushes the engaging part to slide in a direction toward the side of the first surface. Since the protrusion of the driving part is in contact with the clamping part, during the sliding process of the clamping part toward the first surface, the end of the driving part provided with the protrusion is pushed to move toward the first surface.
  • the clamping part may be provided with a clamping hole.
  • the clamping hole is a through hole
  • the clamping hole includes a first hole position and a second hole position that are communicated
  • the first hole position is arranged close to the driving component relative to the second hole position.
  • the mounting portion can pass through the first hole and can be clamped to the second hole.
  • the storage box may also be provided with a plug base, and the plug base and the clip part are arranged on the same side of the drive part.
  • the insertion base has an insertion slot, and the slot of the insertion slot is opened toward the clamping part.
  • the second slot may be constituted by an opening formed in the casing of the storage box body, a clip hole of the clip member, and an insertion slot. In this way, the contact portion of the mounting portion can be inserted into the insertion slot through the opening and the card hole in sequence, and the mounting portion and the body can be fixed by being snapped with the second hole of the card hole.
  • a plurality of contacts may also be provided in the socket, the surface of the contact portion facing away from the detection portion is provided with a plurality of contact areas, and each contact area may correspond to a contact and be connected in communication.
  • the communication connection between the accessory and the storage box is realized.
  • the box cover may have a first rotation position and a second rotation position, and the opening angle of the box cover in the second rotation position is greater than the opening angle of the box cover in the first rotation position.
  • the second hole position of the clamping member is opposite to the opening; when the box cover is in the second rotation position, the first hole position of the clamping member is opposite to the opening.
  • the second hole of the snap-on part is opposite to the opening, the contact part and the detection part are located on both sides of the snap-on part, and the contact part is on the snap-on part. At least part of the projection on is outside the contour of the hole location. In this way, the contact part cannot move in the direction from the second hole position to the opening, so that the clamping and fixing of the mounting part and the clamping part is realized.
  • the contact part of the accessory inserted into the storage box can be drawn out from the second slot through the first hole and the opening; or, the contact part of the accessory can pass through the opening and the first slot.
  • a hole is inserted in the insertion slot, so as to realize the disassembly or installation of the accessories and the storage box.
  • the relative positions of the first hole position and the second hole position of the snap-connection component and the opening can be controlled, thereby realizing the installation and removal of the installation part, which can effectively Improve the assembly efficiency of the installation part and the storage box, and improve the user experience.
  • the transmission mechanism may include a travel switch and a scissor foot structure in some possible implementations of the present application.
  • the travel switch is exposed by the through hole opened in the casing, so as to facilitate the operation.
  • the scissor foot structure may include a first snap pin and a second snap pin, the first snap pin and the second snap pin are hinged, and the travel switch moves from the through hole into the housing to increase the first snap pin and the second snap pin.
  • the angle between the two card pins In this way, when the mounting portion is inserted into the second slot, it can be inserted between the first card pin and the second card pin, and is realized by being connected with the first card pin and the second card pin.
  • the mounting part of the accessory is fixed to the storage box, or the angle between the first clipping pin and the second clipping pin is increased, so that the mounting part can be pulled out from the scissors foot structure, so as to realize the connection between the accessory and the storage box. disassemble.
  • the travel switch when the travel switch is specifically provided, includes a pressing portion, a transmission portion, and a pressing portion.
  • a switch box can be arranged inside the casing, and the switch box is covered and arranged in the through hole.
  • at least part of the pressing part can be accommodated in the switch box, and at least part of the pressing part can extend into the through hole, so that the pressing part can move in the through hole and the cavity of the switch box, which is beneficial to improve the stability of the movement of the pressing part sex.
  • the transmission part extends from the pressing part to the inside of the casing, the pressing part is arranged on the end of the pressing part that is away from the mounting part, and the pressing part can exert a pressing force on the first clamping pin and the second clamping pin, so that the The angle between the first clamping pin and the second clamping pin increases.
  • the second slot includes an opening opened in the housing, and the through hole may be disposed opposite to the opening.
  • the storage box is further provided with a plug base, the plug base has a plug slot, and the notch of the plug slot faces the opening.
  • the first clip pin and the second clip pin part penetrate into the insertion slot, and the other part protrudes from the slot wall of the insertion base close to the travel switch to the outside of the insertion base
  • the pressing portion can be accommodated in an area defined by the portions of the first and second latching pins that protrude to the outside of the plug base. In this way, the pressing portion moves within the interval defined by the two clipping pins, so that the first clipping pin and the second clipping pin can be squeezed, and the first clipping pin and the second clipping pin can be squeezed. The angle between them increases.
  • the end of the part of the first snap pin that penetrates into the insertion slot can be made The part has a first hook, and the end of the part of the second hook foot that penetrates into the insertion slot has a second hook, and both the first hook and the second hook are connected to the first hook and the second hook.
  • the contact part can be inserted into the area defined by the first clip pin and the second clip pin, and is connected with the first hook and the second hook, so as to realize the connection between the accessories and the second hook.
  • an elastic member is used to connect the part of the first clip pin which penetrates into the plug base and the part of the second clip pin which penetrates into the plug base, and the elastic part is in a stretched state.
  • the first clamping pin and the second clamping pin can be reset under the elastic pulling force of the elastic member.
  • the reset of the first clipping pin and the second clipping pin can exert a force toward the through hole on the pressing portion of the travel switch, thereby pushing the travel switch to extend into the through hole, so as to facilitate subsequent use by the user.
  • a limiting portion may also be provided on the surface of the plug base facing the travel switch. In this way, when the travel switch moves toward the scissor foot structure to the set travel distance, the pressing part abuts against the limiting part, so that the impact between the travel switch and the plug base can be avoided to prolong its service life.
  • a sealing ring can also be sleeved on the connecting part, so that when the connecting part is inserted into the second groove, the sealing ring can interfere with the opening of the second groove, so as to realize the connection between the connecting part and the casing. It can prevent impurities such as liquid dust and other impurities from entering the casing and causing damage to accessories or storage boxes, so as to prolong the service life of wireless audio equipment components.
  • the first slot and the second slot can also be arranged on the same surface of the body.
  • the second slot can also be accommodated in the accommodating space formed by the box cover and the body cover, thereby improving the appearance integrity and aesthetics of the storage box.
  • first slot and the second slot are arranged on the same surface of the main body, in order to enable the accessory to be inserted into the second slot, when setting the structure of the accessory, one of the connection part and the detection part can be used.
  • the end parts are connected, and the contact part is bent from the connection part to the side of the storage box.
  • at least one slot wall of the second slot is provided with a first limiting structure, and the contact portion is provided with a second limiting portion, so that the first limiting portion can correspond to the second limiting portion one-to-one.
  • the limit clip connection can realize the clip connection and fixation of the contact part and the main body, thereby realizing the fixed connection between the accessories and the storage box.
  • a first magnet may also be provided in the detection portion, and the first magnet is provided at an end of the detection portion away from the contact portion, which It can be understood that the first magnet and the connecting portion are located at two opposite ends of the detection portion.
  • the storage box is also provided with a second magnet, and the second magnet can be exemplarily arranged on the inner surface of the housing of the storage box. Then, the accessories and the storage box can also be fixed by mutual attraction between the first magnet and the second magnet.
  • a plurality of contacts are arranged in the second slot, a plurality of contact areas are arranged in the contact portion, and each contact area is in contact with and communicated with a contact.
  • the contacts can be connected to the cable connection seat of the main circuit board of the storage box through the cable.
  • the number of contacts is not limited, and each contact can be connected to a power line or a communication line to realize the functions of power supply and communication.
  • the contact area may be formed by an exposed pad of a contact circuit board of the accessory, and the contact circuit board may be provided on the connection portion.
  • a cable socket may be left on the contact circuit board, one end of the wire is connected to the cable socket, and the other end is connected to the accessory main circuit board through the circuit board socket.
  • the main circuit board of the accessory can be arranged in the shell of the detection part of the accessory, and the detection part can be sealed by the rear shell which is buckled on the shell, and the rear shell can be made of soft rubber or silicone material. In this way, after the accessories are assembled with the storage box, the rear case can be in contact with the storage box, so that the friction when the two are in contact can be reduced, thereby reducing the wear on the storage box.
  • accessories can be carried along with the storage box.
  • the accessories are required to be small in size.
  • the accessory is not provided with a separate battery, and the power required for the realization of the function of the accessory is provided by the storage box.
  • the storage box is provided with a central processing unit, a battery, and a first switch tube, and the central processing unit can control the conduction state of the battery and the accessories through the first switch tube.
  • a diode may also be provided in the storage box, and the diode is used to protect the switch tube and the battery, and prevent the current from the accessories from being reversely injected.
  • the accessories are provided with supercapacitors, diodes and functional circuits. After connecting the storage box to the accessories, the charging current flows from the battery of the storage box to the accessories, and the accessories can use supercapacitors for power storage. The electricity stored in the supercapacitor can be used to power functional circuits through a diode.
  • the storage box may further include a first analog switch, wherein the central processing unit may control the first analog switch to conduct with the battery, and use the connection line formed by the first analog switch and the battery as the The power cord charges the accessory. Since the type of accessories is related to the charging time, the corresponding relationship table between the charging power required by different accessories and the time can be stored in the storage box, so that the charging time of the accessories can be timed according to the type of accessories, and the charging device for the accessories can be charged in the storage box. After a fixed time, the connection between the first analog switch and the battery is disconnected through the central processing unit. This charges the accessory for a single use, which avoids unnecessary power consumption. In addition, after the connection between the first analog switch and the battery is disconnected, the first analog switch can be switched to a state of being turned on with the digital pin of the central processing unit for data transmission.
  • a second analog switch may also be provided at the accessory end, and the second analog switch may be used to conduct electricity with the supercapacitor and store power.
  • the positive pole of the supercapacitor can be connected to a comparator. When the comparator judges that the voltage of the supercapacitor exceeds the set value, the comparator controls the second analog switch to switch to a state of conducting with the digital pin of the accessory for data transmission and take over.
  • the circuit system in which the storage box charges the accessories can reuse the positive power line and the data communication line between the accessories and the storage box through the analog switch, thereby reducing the complexity of the connection interface between the two. degree, thereby improving the reliability of the system.
  • the storage box may also be provided with an accessory trigger switch.
  • the trigger switch When the trigger switch is turned on, the storage box supplies power to the accessories, so as to realize the power supply of the storage box to the accessories in a relatively short period of time. Communication between the two; when the trigger switch is turned off, the storage box stops power supply to the accessories, so that zero power consumption can be achieved and power consumption can be reduced.
  • a communication module may also be provided in the storage box, and the central processing unit of the storage box can control the communication module to communicate with wireless audio devices, accessories and external terminal devices.
  • the communication module may include a Bluetooth module and an antenna.
  • the communication module may further include a digital-to-analog conversion module, a sub-controlled oscillator and an ultrasonic generator.
  • the digital-to-analog converter can be used to convert the digital signal in the central processing unit into an analog signal
  • the voltage-controlled oscillator is used to modulate the analog signal to the ultrasonic range
  • the ultrasonic generator can be used to transmit the modulated signal to the outside.
  • the wireless audio device assembly may also have a protective shell.
  • the protective shell may include a first cover body and a second cover body, wherein the first cover body can be sleeved on the main body of the storage box, and the second cover body can be sleeved on the box cover of the storage box, Thus, the protection of the storage box is realized.
  • the first body may also be provided with a functional module and a connection interface.
  • the functional module can be communicated and connected with the storage box through the connection interface.
  • the first cover body can also realize bidirectional charging and communication with the main body of the storage box through the coils in the first cover body.
  • connection method between the connection interface and the storage box reference may be made to the connection between the accessory and the storage box.
  • connection interface may be inserted in the second slot.
  • the protective shell can be used as an accessory on the basis of protecting the storage box.
  • the present application provides a communication method, which is applied to a wireless audio device assembly, wherein the wireless audio device assembly includes a storage box, a wireless audio device, and accessories, and the accessories are detachably connected to the storage box,
  • the accessory includes a sensor for health monitoring, and the method may include: the storage box receives a first operation of a pairing button on the storage box by a user; the storage box responds to the first operation and controls the storage box.
  • the accessory enters the accessory working mode; the storage box receives the detection data of the accessory in the accessory working mode.
  • the accessories can be connected to the storage box to realize the function expansion of the storage box, and after the accessories have detected the data, the detection data of the accessories can be sent to the storage box, so that the storage box can send the detection data of the accessories to the storage box. Sending it to an external terminal device or wireless audio device can improve the user experience.
  • the method before the storage box receives the user's first operation on the pairing button on the storage box, the method further includes: connecting the storage box and the accessory through a micro switch .
  • the storage box can be connected to the accessories through a micro switch newly added to the hardware.
  • the connection here may include a communication connection (pairing connection) and a physical connection.
  • the wireless audio device includes a first wireless audio device and a second wireless audio device; the method further includes: the storage box sending the detection data to the first wireless audio device ; the first wireless audio device sends the detection data to the second wireless audio device.
  • the storage box can transmit the detection data of the accessories to the wireless audio device outside the box through the wireless audio device in the box.
  • the detection data of the accessory can be sent to one wireless audio device through the Bluetooth module on the storage box, and then forwarded to another wireless audio device.
  • the method further includes: storing the detection data by the second wireless audio device sent to the first electronic device.
  • the detection data of the accessory can be sent to the external terminal device through the wireless audio device.
  • the method further includes: the storage box sending the detection data to a first electronic device, where the first electronic device is connected to the storage box in a first communication manner. electronic equipment.
  • the storage box can directly send the detection data of the accessory to the external terminal device.
  • the method further includes: receiving, by the wireless audio device, detection data sent by the first electronic device.
  • the storage box can directly send the detection data of the accessory to the external terminal device through the Bluetooth module, and then the external terminal device sends the detection data of the accessory to the wireless audio device.
  • the first electronic device is communicatively connected to the second electronic device through a second communication manner; the method further includes: the storage box receives a second operation of the user, and the second operation is a trigger operation on the control button on the storage box; the storage box generates a control command corresponding to the second operation according to the second operation; the storage box sends the control command to the the first electronic device, so that the first electronic device sends the control instruction to the second electronic device.
  • the scene of controlling the smart home through the storage box or accessories can be realized, and the user does not need to operate on the application program of the mobile phone, which can improve the user experience.
  • the method before the storage box receives the detection data of the accessory in the accessory working mode, the method further includes: the storage box receives the auxiliary sensing data sent by the accessory; If it is determined that the user's operation is incorrect according to the auxiliary sensing data and the pre-stored sensing data, the storage box sends voice prompt information to the wireless audio device.
  • the storage box can prompt the user's operation, so that the user can adjust the correct posture to operate, and the detected data can be more accurate.
  • the wireless audio device includes a first wireless audio device and a second wireless audio device; when the storage box includes an ultrasonic carrier communication module, the method further includes: the first wireless audio device The audio device receives the first detection data of the accessory sent by the ultrasonic carrier communication module on the storage box; the first wireless audio device determines the first wireless audio device and the second detection data according to the first detection data and the second detection data.
  • the ultrasonic phase offset between the second wireless audio devices wherein the second detection data is the detection data of the accessories sent by the ultrasonic carrier communication module on the storage box received by the second wireless audio device,
  • the first detection data and the second detection data are different; the first wireless audio device fuses the first detection data and the second detection data according to the ultrasonic phase offset, and obtains the fusion result. data.
  • the data of the two wireless audio devices can be fused, so that the frequency band of the demodulated data is wider, so that the wireless audio device can receive a signal of a higher frequency band.
  • the present application provides an apparatus, which may include a storage box, a wireless audio device, and accessories.
  • an apparatus which may include a storage box, a wireless audio device, and accessories.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless audio device component provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless audio device component provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a circuit system for charging accessories with a storage box according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a circuit system of a storage box provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of a storage box for charging accessories provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless audio device component provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless audio device component provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless audio device component provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 10 is the main structure for realizing the detachable connection between the accessories and the storage box provided by an embodiment of the application;
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an accessory provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 13 is a state diagram of the storage box provided by an embodiment of the application when it is opened to the first rotation position;
  • 15 is a process diagram of disassembling an accessory from a body of a storage box according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 16 is a state diagram of the accessory and the storage box provided by an embodiment of the application when the disassembly is completed;
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless audio device component provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of an accessory and a storage box provided in another embodiment of the application in an assembled state
  • 19 is a process diagram of disassembling an accessory from a body of a storage box according to another embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 20 is a state diagram when the accessories and the storage box provided by another embodiment of the application are completely disassembled
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless audio device component provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • 22 is a schematic structural diagram of the accessory and the storage box provided in an embodiment of the application in a disassembled state
  • Figure 23 is an enlarged view of the partial structure at A in Figure 22;
  • 24 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of a storage box provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 25 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of an accessory provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 26 is a schematic structural diagram of a contact circuit of an accessory provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 27 is a cross-sectional view of a component of a wireless audio device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • Fig. 28 is a circuit system for charging accessories provided by a storage box according to another embodiment of the application.
  • 29 is a block diagram of a circuit system of a storage box provided by another embodiment of the application.
  • 30 is a graph showing the relationship between human hearing loss and age according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless audio device component provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • 32 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless audio device component provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 33 is an enlarged view of the partial structure at B in Figure 32;
  • 34 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a storage box provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram of transition between a working mode provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 37A is a schematic diagram of a user interface for pairing an accessory with a storage box according to an embodiment of the application
  • 37B is a flowchart of a method for pairing an accessory with a storage box according to an embodiment of the application.
  • 38A is a schematic diagram of communication between a wireless audio device and a terminal device according to an embodiment of the application.
  • 38B is a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting accessory detection data according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 38C is a flowchart of a method for transmitting accessory detection data according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 38D is a schematic diagram of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 39A is a schematic diagram of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 39B is a schematic diagram of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 40A is a schematic diagram of an application scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 40B is a schematic diagram of a storage box connected with accessories according to an embodiment of the application.
  • 40C is a schematic diagram of auscultation performed by a user through a storage box
  • 40D is a schematic flowchart of a health measurement using an accessory according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 40E is a flowchart of a health measurement method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 41A is a schematic structural diagram of another storage box provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 41B is a schematic diagram of a signal of a frame header of a different type provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 41C is an interactive flowchart of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 41D is a schematic diagram of performing data alignment according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 41E is a schematic diagram of performing data fusion according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 41F is a schematic diagram of a data demodulation processing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 41G is a schematic diagram of a zero-crossing point detection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 41H is a schematic diagram of a sampling frequency range of a single channel and a dual channel provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 42 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 1-storage box 1001-battery; 1002-communication module; 10021-bluetooth module; 10022-antenna;
  • 10023-digital-to-analog converter 10024-voltage-controlled oscillator; 10025-ultrasonic generator; 1003-pairing module;
  • 1004-power management module 1005-status indicator; 1006-in-position detection sensor; 1007-micro switch;
  • 11071-cable connector 1108-interface module; 11081-interface socket; 11082-interface conversion circuit board;
  • 11012-wireless charging base 11013-charging coil; 11014-charging cable; 11015-shell; 110151-chute;
  • 11016 - connecting arm 110161 - first abutting part; 110162 - first rotating shaft; 11017 - driving part;
  • 110212-transmission part 110213-extrusion part; 11022-buffer part; 11023-scissors foot structure; 110231-first snap pin;
  • 4005-ID generation module 4006-communication module; 4007-accessory interface; 4008-super capacitor; 4009-diode;
  • 40010-functional circuit 400101-amplifier; 400102-filter; 400103-analog-to-digital converter; 400104-memory;
  • At least one involved in the embodiments of the present application includes one or more; wherein, multiple refers to greater than or equal to two.
  • words such as “first” and “second” are only used for the purpose of distinguishing the description, and should not be understood as indicating or implying relative importance, nor should it be understood as indicating or implied order.
  • references in this specification to "one embodiment” or “some embodiments” and the like mean that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment is included in one or more embodiments of the present application.
  • appearances of the phrases “in one embodiment,” “in some embodiments,” “in other embodiments,” “in other embodiments,” etc. in various places in this specification are not necessarily All refer to the same embodiment, but mean “one or more but not all embodiments” unless specifically emphasized otherwise.
  • the terms “including”, “including”, “having” and their variants mean “including but not limited to” unless specifically emphasized otherwise.
  • a wireless audio device can be a headset, which integrates key components such as a wireless antenna, a processor chip, a battery, a microphone, a speaker, a wearing sensor, and a control sensor, so that it can communicate audio data with external devices such as mobile phones through its own wireless communication function. transmission.
  • wireless audio equipment has the advantages of being portable and capable of wireless communication, coupled with the continuous maturity of wireless Bluetooth transmission technology, its use experience has been gradually improved. It is expected to completely replace wired headphones in the future and become an indispensable portable device in users' lives. .
  • the battery of wireless audio device is small, which can only store the power for short-term use.
  • the wireless audio device 2 is usually equipped with a storage box 1, so that the storage box 1 and the wireless audio device 2 can be used as components of the wireless audio device 2 as shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the storage box 1 can perform basic functions such as storage and charging, and the transmission of wireless audio data is completed by the wireless audio device 2 itself.
  • the user In order to replenish the power in time and prevent the wireless audio device 2 from being lost, the user usually has to carry the storage box 1 with him.
  • the current storage box 1 itself has a large volume and a relatively single function, which leads to a poor user experience.
  • the present application provides a wireless audio device assembly, so as to realize the function expansion of the storage box of the wireless audio device.
  • the storage box is a portable item, it is convenient to integrate functions such as mobile health, audio-visual entertainment, and smart assistants that can enhance the intelligent experience, thereby providing users with a better experience.
  • the wireless audio device components provided by the embodiments of the present application, the specific setting manners thereof will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • FIG. 2 is a system block diagram of a wireless audio device component provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the wireless audio device assembly may include a storage box 1 and at least one wireless audio device 2 , and the at least one wireless audio device 2 may be stored in the storage box 1 .
  • the storage box 1 can be provided with a plurality of functional modules, exemplarily, the battery 1001, the communication module 1002, the pairing module 1003, the power management module 1004, the status indicator 1005, the presence detection sensor 1006, the micro switch 1007, memory 1008, audio device interface 1009, etc.
  • the storage box 1 of the present application can be connected with the external terminal device 3 for wired or wireless communication.
  • the pairing module 1003 can be activated, so that the communication module 1002 in the storage box 1 can transmit signals to the external terminal device 3, or receive signals.
  • the central processing unit (center processing unit, CPU 10010) in the storage box 1 can process and analyze the received signal, and then send it to the wireless audio device 2, or store it through the memory 1008.
  • the pairing module 1003 can also be used as a switch for realizing the matching between the storage box 1 and the wireless audio device 2.
  • the storage box 1 may also be provided with a button 10011 .
  • the button 10011 can be exemplarily used as a switch of the power management module 1004 of the storage box 1 .
  • the power management module 1004 can control the battery of the storage box 1 .
  • the power management module 1004 controls the battery of the storage box 1 , for example, monitoring the power of the battery 1001 , controlling the battery 1001 of the storage box 1 to charge, or supplying power to the wireless audio device 2 .
  • the button 10011 can also be used as a switch of other functional modules, and the button 10011 can be matched and connected with the corresponding functional module according to specific needs.
  • the status indicator light 1005 can play a role of indicating the working state of the storage box 1 .
  • the status indicator light 1005 can be in the process of indicating the working status of the storage box 1 . It is not limited to be always on, but can also be continuously flashing, or turn off after being lit for a set time.
  • the status indicator 1005 is in a blinking state, and when the two complete the communication connection, the status indicator 1005 is in a steady state.
  • the status indicator 1005 when the charging of the storage box 1 is completed, the status indicator 1005 is always on; in the initial stage of charging the wireless audio device 2 by the storage box 1, the status indicator 1005 flashes for a set time and then turns off.
  • the status indicator 1005 can not only indicate the working state of the storage box 1 by its state form, but also can distinguish the working state of the storage box 1 by the color of the light.
  • whether the connection between the wireless audio device 2 and the storage box 1 is in place can be detected by the presence detection sensor 1006 .
  • the detection result of the presence detection sensor 1006 can also be indicated by the status indicator 1005 .
  • the wireless audio device 2 may be integrated with a battery 2001, a microphone 2002, a speaker 2003, a communication module 2004, an interactive control module 2005, etc. In other embodiments of the present application, the wireless audio device 2 may also be integrated with a wearable components such as sensors and control sensors. In addition, the wireless audio device 2 also has an audio device interface 2006 that can be connected to the audio device interface 1009 in the storage box 1 to realize signal interaction between the wireless audio device 2 and the storage box 1 .
  • FIG. 2 shows a state in which the two wireless audio devices 2 are connected to the storage box 1 .
  • the audio device interface 1009 in the storage box 1 can be set in a one-to-one correspondence with the audio device interface 2006 of the two or more wireless audio devices 2, so that the audio device interface 2006 of each wireless audio device 2 can be connected with the audio device interface 2006 of each wireless audio device 2.
  • An audio device interface 1009 is correspondingly connected to realize an independent pairing connection between each wireless audio device 2 and the storage box 1 , which can reduce mutual interference between the wireless audio devices 2 .
  • the wireless audio device assembly of the present application may further include an accessory 4 , which exemplarily can be used in the field of wearable health detection.
  • the accessory 4 can be integrated with a health detection module, which includes but is not limited to one or more of auscultation sensors, heart rate sensors, pressure pulse wave sensors, human body temperature sensors, electrocardiogram sensors, bioelectrical impedance sensors and other sensors. kind.
  • accessory 4 may also be integrated into the accessory 4, such as an analog-to-digital conversion module 4002, a power supply module 4003, an interactive control module 4004, an ID generation module 4005, a communication module 4006, and the like.
  • an analog-to-digital conversion module 4002 may also be integrated into the accessory 4, such as an analog-to-digital conversion module 4002, a power supply module 4003, an interactive control module 4004, an ID generation module 4005, a communication module 4006, and the like.
  • the accessory interface 4007 of the accessory 4 is connected in communication with the accessory interface 10012 in the storage box 1 , so that the data detected by the accessory 4 can be transmitted to the storage box 1 , the wireless audio device 2 and the external terminal device 3 . At least one is processed.
  • the user can choose and carry the necessary accessories 4 according to their own needs, so as to carry out regular or irregular health detection, collect and record health data, and then conduct automatic diagnosis through the detection algorithm.
  • wireless audio equipment 2 can also be used. Broadcast sensor information and diagnostic results to users.
  • the accessory 4 in the process of performing a single health measurement, can also perform audio prompts through the wireless audio device 2, for example, prompting the user to move the position of the accessory 4 or the way of holding it, so as to make the measurement result more effective .
  • the accessory 4 may also be used in the field of audio interaction.
  • the accessory interface 4007 of the accessory 4 is communicatively connected to the accessory interface 10012 of the storage box 1 , the external sensor information and control information collected by the accessory 4 can be used to interact with the connected wireless audio device 2 .
  • the accessory 4 can integrate inertial sensors for use in virtual reality scenarios.
  • the user holds the storage box 1 connected with the accessories 4 as a controller, and uses the external display device and the wireless audio device 2 itself to calculate the sound source orientation and realize functions such as stereo playback.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a circuit system for charging the accessories 4 through the storage box 1 .
  • the circuit system mainly includes two parts, namely the accessory circuit and the storage box circuit. Since the battery 1001 in the storage box 1 can supply power to the storage box 1 and the accessory 4 , an independent battery may not be provided in the accessory 4 to save the corresponding power management circuit cost.
  • the CPU 10010 of the storage box 1 controls the connectivity between the battery 1001 and the accessory interface 10012 of the storage box 1 through the switch tube 10013, so as to control the battery 1001 and the accessory 4 conduction states between.
  • the diode 10014 is used to protect the switch tube 10013 and the battery 1001 to prevent the current of the accessory 4 from being reversely injected.
  • the charging current flows from the battery 1001 of the storage box 1 to the accessory 4, and the accessory 4 can use the super capacitor 4008 for power storage, which has the advantages of small size and fast charging speed. Fast and simple charging control circuit.
  • the power stored by the accessory 4 through the super capacitor 4008 can supply power to the functional circuit 40010 of the accessory 4 through the diode 4009, so as to realize the corresponding accessory function.
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a circuit system of a storage box 1 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the circuit system of the storage box 1 may include the CPU 10010, the memory 1008, the battery 1001, the switch tube 10013, the accessory interface 10012, the micro switch 1007, the status indicator light 1005, the power management module 1004 and the communication module 1002 in the above embodiment.
  • the communication module 1002 may include a Bluetooth module 10021 and an antenna 10022, a memory 1008, a switch tube 10013, a micro switch 1007, a status indicator 1005, a power management module 1004, and a Bluetooth module 10021, all of which can be directly communicated with the CPU 10010,
  • the power management module 1004 can monitor the power of the battery 1001 and manage the charging process; the CPU 10010 can control the switch tube 10013 to be turned on, so that the battery 1001 can charge the accessory 4 through the accessory interface 10012; in addition, the Bluetooth module 10021 and the antenna 10022 are available For communication with the external terminal device 3 and the wireless audio device 2 .
  • FIG. 5 is a circuit system for charging the accessories 4 by the storage box 1 according to a possible embodiment of the present application.
  • the functional circuit 40010 of the accessory 4 may generally include a sensor 4001 and a corresponding amplifier 400101, a filter 400102 for signal conditioning, an analog-to-digital converter 400103 (A/D converter), a memory 400104, and the like.
  • the digital signal can be transmitted to the CPU 10010 of the storage box 1 through the accessory interface 10012; when the accessory 4 is used as the driving function module, the accessory interface 4007 is connected to the driver 400105 in the accessory 4 to drive the actuator 400106 to perform corresponding Variety.
  • the CPU 10010 controls the switch tube 10013 to turn on, so that the battery 1001 charges the accessory 4 through the accessory interface 10012, and the super capacitor 4008 in the accessory 4 receives power in a short time and When stored, the stored electrical energy is sufficient for the accessory 4 to perform its corresponding function once. The next time you use the accessory 4, turn on the switch tube 10013 again, and repeat the charging process.
  • the accessory 4 and the at least one wireless audio device 2 are both communicatively connected to the storage box 1 .
  • the accessory 4 can transmit sensor data, interactive control information, accessory ID and other information to the storage box 1 .
  • the CPU 10010 of the storage box 1 processes the data
  • the received information is transmitted to the wireless audio equipment 2 that is paired with it, or to the external terminal equipment 3 through the communication module.
  • the data information of the wireless audio device 2 and the external terminal device 3 can also be processed by the communication module 1002 and the CPU 10010 of the storage box 1, and then sent to the accessory 4 for processing. It can be seen that, in the present application, the function of the storage box 1 is effectively expanded, which can improve the user experience.
  • the volume of the wireless audio device 1 is generally small, it is difficult to integrate components that meet various requirements.
  • the components used to realize the audio function of the wireless audio device 1 can also be arranged in the storage box 1 , so as to enrich the volume of the wireless audio device 1 without changing the volume of the wireless audio device 1 . audio experience.
  • some possible sensors can also be integrated in the box cover 12 , and the sensors can interact with at least one of the wireless audio device 2 and the accessory 4 , so that the function of the storage box 1 is further improved extension.
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic structural diagram of components of a wireless audio device 2 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the storage box 1 may include a main body 11 and a box cover 12 , wherein the box cover 12 and the main body 11 can be hinged, so that the box cover 12 can rotate around the hinge point between the box cover 12 and the main body 11 , to The opening and closing of the box cover 12 is realized.
  • the box cover 12 can also be detachably connected with the body 11 .
  • the main body 11 is provided with a first slot 1101 , and the first slot 1101 is used for accommodating the wireless audio device 2 .
  • the first slots 1101 can be set in a one-to-one correspondence with the wireless audio devices 2 , so that each wireless audio device 2 can be inserted into one of the first slots 1101 , so as to avoid wear and tear caused by collisions between the wireless audio devices 2 .
  • there may be one first slot 1101 so that at least one wireless audio device 2 is accommodated in the one first slot 1101 , so as to simplify the structure of the storage box 1 .
  • the first slot 1101 can be arranged at any position of the body 11 of the storage box 1 , and the box cover 12 of the storage box 1 is arranged close to the first slot 1101 .
  • 6 shows the structure of the components of the wireless audio device 2 when the box cover 12 is opened.
  • the first slot 1101 can be exposed, so that the wireless audio device 2 can be removed from the first slot 1101. Take it out, or insert the wireless audio device 2 into the first slot 1101 .
  • the surface of the body 11 of the storage box 1 for setting the first slot 1101 may be referred to as the first surface 1103 of the body 11
  • the surface connected to the first surface 1103 may be referred to as the body 11 of the second surface 1104.
  • the second surface 1104 of the main body 11 can be used as the appearance surface of the main body 11 .
  • the first slot 1101 can be located in the accommodating space formed by the box cover 12 and the main body 11, so that the first slot 1101 is hidden in the storage box 1, so that the The storage function of the wireless audio device 2 inserted in the first slot 1101 can prevent the wireless audio device 2 from falling.
  • the box cover 12 when the box cover 12 is closed with the main body 11 , the box cover 12 can also be abutted with the wireless audio device 2 inserted in the first slot 1101 , thereby reducing the shaking of the wireless audio device 2 in the storage box 1 . .
  • the first slot 1101 can also be used as a charging slot for the wireless audio device 2, so that the functions of storage and charging are integrated into the first slot 1101.
  • the storage box 1 can charge the wireless audio device 2 , so as to simplify the structure of the storage box 1 .
  • the presence detection sensor 1006 of the storage box 1 may also be disposed in the first slot 1101 to detect the insertion position of the wireless audio device 2 in the first slot 1101 .
  • the multiple first slots 1101 can be arranged close to each other, so that the multiple first slots 1101 can be 1101 can be hidden in the accommodating space formed between the box cover 12 and the main body 11 .
  • the accessory 4 when connecting the accessory 4 to the storage box 1, for example, the accessory 4 can be connected to the body 11 of the storage box 1, and at least a part of the accessory 4 is exposed outside the storage box 1, so as to The accessory 4 can be easily applied to scenarios that need to be in contact with the user (for example, a health detection scenario), so as to improve the detection accuracy.
  • the main body 11 of the storage box 1 may also be provided with a second slot (not shown in the figure), so that the accessory 4 can be fixedly connected to the main body 11 through the second slot.
  • the accessory interface 4007 of the accessory 4 can be connected to the accessory interface 10012 in the storage box 1 to realize the communication connection between the two.
  • the storage box 1 The accessory interface 10012 can be integrated into the second slot to simplify the structure of the main body 11 .
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a component of a wireless audio device according to a possible embodiment of the present application.
  • the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 are detachably connected, so that the accessory 4 can be installed in the storage box 1 according to specific needs, or removed from the storage box 1 for replacement, so that the user can choose whether to carry it Accessories 4, and choose accessories 4 that meet your needs to enhance the user experience.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless audio device assembly according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the second slot 1102 may be disposed on the second surface 1104 of the main body 11 of the storage box 1 , so that the accessory 4 can be connected to the second surface 1104 of the storage box 1 .
  • the second slot 1102 and the first slot 1101 are located on different surfaces of the main body 11, so that mutual interference between the first slot 1101 and the second slot 1102 can be avoided during specific settings. .
  • the accessory 4 may include a detection portion 41 and an installation portion 42 , wherein the detection portion 41 may be exposed to the outside of the storage box 1 , so that the sensor integrated in the accessory 4 may be disposed in the detection portion 41 .
  • the mounting portion 42 can be inserted into the second slot 1102 of the main body 11 , so that the fixed connection between the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 is achieved through the fixed connection between the mounting portion 42 and the main body 11 .
  • FIG. 9 is an exploded view of each component of a wireless audio device assembly according to a possible embodiment of the present application. 8 and 9 together, the storage box 1 may be provided with a first bracket 1105 and a second bracket 1106, wherein the first slot 1101 is arranged in the first bracket 1105, and is corresponding to the first bracket 1105.
  • An accommodating cavity 11051 may be provided at the slot 1101 , and the accommodating cavity 11051 may be provided in a cylindrical shape, so as to facilitate the storage of the wireless audio device 2 .
  • the second bracket 1106 can support the first bracket 1105, and the second bracket 1106 can be provided with a clamping slot 11061 matching the outer contour of the accommodating cavity 11051, so that the accommodating cavity 11051 can be clamped to the
  • the second bracket 1106 improves the structural stability of the first bracket 1105 .
  • the storage box 1 is also provided with a storage box main circuit board 1107, and the CPU, in-position detection sensor, memory, digital-to-analog conversion module, communication module, etc. in the above-mentioned embodiment can all be arranged in the storage box. on the main printed circuit board 1107.
  • An interface module 1108 is disposed at the bottom of the storage box 1 (the side opposite to the first surface), and the interface module 1108 may be, but not limited to, a universal serial bus (USB) interface module.
  • the interface module 1108 may include a connected interface socket 11081 , an interface conversion circuit board 11082 and a flat cable 11083 .
  • the flexible cable 11083 can be, for example, but not limited to, a flexible flexible cable, so as to facilitate the connection between the flexible cable 1083 and the main circuit board 1107 of the storage box, so as to realize the communication connection between the interface module 1108 and the main circuit board 1107 of the storage box.
  • the storage box 1 also has an interface circuit board 1109 , and electrical contact sockets 11091 a and 11091 b provided on the interface circuit board 1109 . It can be understood that, after the first bracket 1105 and the second bracket 1106 are assembled, they can be inserted into the electrical contact socket 11091a and the electrical contact socket 11091b, so that the electrical contact socket 11091a and the electrical contact socket 11091b are The wireless audio device 2 inserted into the first bracket 1105 is charged, or the communication between the wireless audio device 2 and the storage box 1 is implemented.
  • the battery 1001 of the storage box 1 can be fixed by the battery fixing member 11010.
  • the storage box 1 can also be provided with a wireless charging base 11012, a charging coil 11013 and a charging Line 11014.
  • the charging cable 11014 can be connected to the battery 1001 to charge the battery 1001 .
  • each component of the storage box 1 described above can be accommodated in the housing 11015 of the storage box 1, so as to protect the components.
  • the appearance integrity and aesthetics of the storage box 1 can also be improved.
  • FIG. 10 shows the main structure for realizing the detachable connection between the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 according to an embodiment, which is omitted.
  • the wireless audio device 2 and other structures of the storage box 1 are presented.
  • the part of the storage box 1 for connecting with the accessories 4 is mainly a transmission mechanism that cooperates with the box cover 12, the transmission mechanism is located in the box of the storage box, and the transmission mechanism may include a connecting arm 11016, a driving mechanism component 11017 and snap-on component 11018.
  • the connecting arm 11016 can be used to connect the cover 12 of the storage box 1 and the driving component 11017.
  • one end of the connecting arm 11016 is fixed to the cover 12 of the storage box 1, and the other end is provided with a first abutting portion 110161.
  • the driving part 11017 is disposed between the connecting arm 11016 and the clamping part 11018 , and the driving part 11017 extends along the direction of the connecting arm 11016 to the clamping part 11018 .
  • One end of the driving member 11017 close to the connecting arm 11016 is provided with a second abutting portion 110171 , and the second abutting portion 110171 can abut with the first abutting portion 110161 .
  • One end of the driving part 11017 close to the clamping part 11018 is provided with a protrusion 110172 , and the protrusion 110172 can abut with the clamping part 11018 .
  • the clamping part 11018 is provided with a clamping hole 110181, and the clamping hole 110181 is a through hole.
  • the clamping hole 110181 may include a first hole position 110181a and a second hole position 110181b which are communicated with each other, wherein the first hole position 110181a is disposed close to the driving component 11017 relative to the second hole position 110181b.
  • the first hole 110181a can be a regular-shaped hole such as a round hole or a strip hole, or a special-shaped hole, as long as the mounting portion 42 of the accessory 4 can pass through.
  • the second hole position 110181b can be a regular-shaped hole such as a round hole or a strip hole, or a special-shaped hole, as long as it can be engaged with the mounting portion 42 of the fitting 4, so as to prevent the fitting 4 from falling off the engaging member 11018 .
  • the shapes of the first hole 110181a and the second hole 110181b may be the same or different.
  • the first hole 110181a is a circular hole
  • the second hole 110181b For the strip hole.
  • the connecting arm 11016 can rotate around a first rotating shaft 110162, and the first rotating shaft 110162 can be fixed to the casing 11015 of the storage box 1 as shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the connecting arm 11016 is fixedly connected with the box cover 12, the box cover 12 can also be rotated by the first rotating shaft 110162 as a shaft during the process of being closed or opened with the main body 11, so that the box cover 12 is hinged with the main body 11, Therefore, it is beneficial to simplify the structure of the storage box 1 .
  • the driving member 11017 can rotate around the second rotation shaft 110173 , and the rotation direction of the driving member 11017 is opposite to the rotation direction of the connecting arm 11016 .
  • the second rotating shaft 110173 may also be fixed to the housing 11015 of the storage box 1 as shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the rotation direction of the driving member 11017 is opposite to the rotation direction of the connecting arm 11016 means: when the connecting arm 11016 rotates clockwise, the driving member 11017 rotates counterclockwise; When rotating counterclockwise, the driving member 11017 can rotate clockwise.
  • the storage box 1 is also provided with a plug base 11019, the plug base 11019 and the clamping part 11018 are arranged on the same side of the driving part 11017, and the plug base 11019 is provided with a plug groove 110191, the notch of the insertion slot 110191 faces the snap-on part 11018.
  • the second slot 1102 may be formed by an opening 110201 formed in the housing 11015 , a clip hole 11081 of the clip part 11018 and an insertion slot 110191 .
  • a plurality of contacts 110192 are arranged in the insertion slot 110191, and the plurality of contacts 110192 can be electrically connected to the main circuit board of the storage box through lead wires.
  • the contact 110192 can be in the form of an elastic sheet, so as to improve the contact reliability between the contact 110192 and the structure inserted in the insertion slot 110191 through the elastic deformation of the elastic sheet.
  • the material of the elastic sheet can be metal, which can effectively increase the effective contact area of the contact 110192, thereby improving the contact reliability thereof.
  • the specific number of contacts 110192 is not limited, and the number of contacts 110192 can be 3, one of the 3 contacts 110192 is connected to the positive power line, one is connected to the negative power line, and the other is connected to the communication line connection to enable simple functions of power supply and communication.
  • more contacts 110192 can be provided, and each contact 110192 can be connected to the main circuit board of the storage box through a lead.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an accessory 4 according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the mounting portion 42 is provided on one surface of the detection portion 41 , and may be provided on the surface of the detection portion 41 facing the body 11 of the storage box 1 , for example.
  • the mounting part 42 may include a connection part 4201 and a contact part 4202 .
  • the contact part 4202 is connected to the detection part 41 through the connection part 4201 , and the contact part 4202 is provided at the end of the connection part 4201 away from the detection part 41 .
  • the projected area of the contact portion 4202 on the detection portion 41 may be larger than the projected area of the connection portion 4201 on the detection portion 41 .
  • a surface of the contact portion 4202 facing away from the detection portion 41 may be provided with contact areas 42021 , and the contact areas 42021 may be a plurality of contact areas 42021 distributed at intervals along the circumferential direction of the mounting portion 42 .
  • the contact area 42021 of the contact portion 4202 can serve as the accessory interface of the accessory 4 mentioned in the above embodiment, and the contact 110192 in the insertion slot 110191 can serve as the accessory interface of the storage box 1 .
  • the number of contact areas 42021 can be the same as the number of contacts 110192 in the insertion slot 110191, so that when the mounting portion 42 is inserted into the insertion slot 110191, the The contact areas 42021 are in one-to-one correspondence with the contacts 110192 and are in communication connection.
  • the numbers of the contact areas 42021 and the contacts 110192 can also be different.
  • the number of contacts 110192 can be greater than that of the contact areas 42021, so that each contact area 42021 can be in corresponding contact with one contact 110192, so that the The accessory 4 is powered by the storage box 1 , and at the same time, the function of the accessory 4 and the communication connection between the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 are realized.
  • FIG. 12 shows a cross-sectional view of the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 in an assembled state according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the box cover 12 of the storage box 1 and the main body 11 are in a closed state.
  • the distance between the first abutting portion 110161 of the connecting arm 11016 and the first surface 1103 of the main body 11 furthest.
  • the second abutting portion 110171 of the driving member 11017 is disposed close to the first surface 1103 of the main body 11 of the storage box 1 relative to the first abutting portion 110161 of the connecting arm 11016 ,
  • the protrusions 110172 of the driving part 11017 protrude from the surface of the driving part 11017 toward the first surface 1103 facing away from the body 11 .
  • the clamping part 11018 and the plug base 11019 are disposed on the side of the driving part 11017 away from the first surface 1103 of the main body 11 .
  • a sliding slot 110151 can be provided on the housing 11015 of the main body 11 , and the sliding slot 110151 can be arranged inside the housing 11015 , And the opening 110201 of the second slot 1102 opened in the casing 11015 is communicated with the sliding slot 110151 , and the engaging member 11018 can slide in the sliding slot 110151 in a direction toward or away from the first surface 1103 of the main body 11 .
  • an elastic member 110152 may be disposed in the sliding groove 110151 , the elastic member 110152 is located on the side of the engaging member 11018 away from the first surface 1103 of the main body 11 , and the elastic member 110152 is in elastic contact with the engaging member 11018 .
  • the elastic member 110152 may be, for example, a spring.
  • a first limiting column 110182 may be provided on the end face of the engaging member 11018 facing away from the first surface 1103 of the body 11 .
  • a second limit post 1101511 may be disposed in the chute 110151 , and the second limit post 1101511 protrudes from the groove wall of the chute 110151 toward the first surface 1103 of the main body 11 .
  • the axes of the first limiting column 110182 and the second limiting column 1101511 may be coincident.
  • the springs can be respectively sleeved on the first limiting column 110182 and the second limiting column 1101511, so as to limit the position of the spring, so as to improve the reliability of the spring movement.
  • the mounting portion 42 of the accessory 4 passes through the opening 110201 of the second slot 1102 and the latching part 11018 and is inserted into the inserting slot 110191 of the inserting base 11019 .
  • the contact portion 4202 of the mounting portion 42 is accommodated in the insertion slot 110191, and the contact area 42021 of the contact portion 4202 is in corresponding contact with the contacts 110192 in the insertion slot 110191. Since the contacts 110192 in the insertion slot 110191 can be in the form of elastic pieces, when the mounting portion 42 is inserted into the insertion slot 110191, the elastic pieces can undergo a certain elastic deformation, so that the contacts 110192 and the contact portion 4202 are in stable contact .
  • the accessory 4 can be fixed with the main body 11 of the storage box 1 by means of snap connection.
  • the mounting portion 42 of the accessory 4 can pass through the first hole 110181a and be clamped to the second hole 11081b.
  • the connecting portion 4201 of the mounting portion 42 can penetrate into the second hole 110181b of the snap-on member 11018 , and the contact portion 4202 and the detection portion 41 are located on the side of the snap-on member 11018 . sides.
  • the contact portion 4202 on the snap-fitting member 11018 is located outside the contour range of the second hole position 110181b. In this way, the contact portion 4202 can be engaged with the engaging member 11018 so as to prevent the accessory 4 from falling off from the body 11 of the storage box 1 .
  • a sealing ring 43 is provided at the connection part of the installation part 42 with the detection part 41 , and the sealing ring 43 can be sleeved with the connection part 4201 .
  • the sealing ring 43 can be clamped at the opening 110201 of the second slot 1102, and the sealing ring 43 can be, but not limited to, a rubber ring.
  • the sealing ring 43 can be an interference fit with the opening 110201 of the second slot 1102 in the casing, so as to improve the connection reliability of the accessory 4 and the storage box 1, and also prevent liquid and dust from entering the storage box 1. Its internal structure causes corrosion, which can effectively extend the service life of wireless audio equipment components. It can be understood that, in some embodiments, when the storage box 1 does not have the accessories 4 , the opening 110201 of the second slot 1102 can be blocked by a sealing plug, so as to improve the internal structure of the storage box 1 .
  • FIG. 13 shows a state in which the box cover 12 of the storage box 1 is opened to the first rotation position.
  • the arrow in FIG. 13 indicates the opening direction of the box cover 12 .
  • the box cover 12 is opened in a clockwise direction as an example for description.
  • the box cover 12 drives the connecting arm 11016 to rotate clockwise around the first rotating shaft 110162 .
  • the first abutting portion 110161 of the connecting arm 11016 moves in a direction close to the second abutting portion 110171 of the driving member 11017, but in the state shown in FIG.
  • the first abutting portion 110161 and the second abutting portion 110171 are not contact; or the first abutting portion 110161 is in contact with the second abutting portion 110171 but there is no force therebetween, or the force between the two is insufficient to drive the driving component 11017 to move.
  • the box cover 12 hover at the position shown in FIG. 13 it is also possible to make the box cover 12 hover at the position shown in FIG. 13 through a reasonable design. In this way, during the process of picking and placing the wireless audio device 2, the connection between the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 can be avoided.
  • FIG. 14 shows the state when the box cover 12 of the storage box 1 is opened to the second rotation position.
  • the force between the first abutting portion 110161 of the connecting arm 11016 and the second abutting portion 110171 of the driving member 11017 drives the driving member 11017 to rotate counterclockwise around the second rotating shaft 110173 .
  • the protrusion 110172 of the driving part 11017 abuts against the clamping part 11018, and pushes the clamping part 11018 in the sliding groove 110151 to slide in the direction away from the first surface 1103 of the main body 11 until the first surface of the clamping part 11018 slides.
  • the hole 110181a (refer to FIG. 10 ) is located opposite to the contact portion 4202 of the accessory 4 .
  • the clipping member 11018 presses the elastic member 110152 , and the elastic member 110152 accumulates elastic force.
  • the elastic coefficient of the elastic member 110152 can also be reasonably set, so that when the elastic member 110152 is compressed to the maximum compression length, the first hole 110181a of the clip portion and the contact portion 4202 of the mounting portion 42 of the accessory 4 are located at the position In contrast, at this time, the box cover 12 cannot be further opened to a larger angle, which can effectively simplify the disassembly process of the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 .
  • the elastic force accumulated during the compression of the elastic member 110152 can also be transmitted to the entire transmission mechanism through the clamping member 11018, so that the transmission mechanism can move to the state shown in FIG. 13 under the elastic action of the elastic member 110152 .
  • the micro switch 1007 mentioned in the above embodiments of the present application may be disposed on the side of the driving component 11017 close to the first surface 1103 of the body 11 .
  • the micro switch 1007 can be fixed on the first surface 1103 of the main body 11 , and the micro switch 1007 can be disposed on the side of the second abutting portion 110171 of the driving component 11017 close to the first surface 1003 of the main body 11 .
  • the driving member 11017 rotates around the second rotating shaft 110173
  • the second contact portion 110171 can touch the micro switch 1007, and the micro switch 1007 transmits the trigger signal to the main circuit of the storage box of the storage box 1 through the connecting wire
  • the CPU on the board handles it accordingly.
  • the transmission mechanism returns to the state shown in FIG. 13, there is no contact between the driving member 11017 and the microswitch 1007, and the microswitch 1007 is reset.
  • FIG. 15 shows the process of disassembling the accessory 4 from the body 11 of the storage box 1 . Since in the state shown in FIG. 14 , the contact portion 4202 of the accessory 4 is opposite to the first hole 110181a of the clip member 11018 , and the clip member 11018 no longer restricts the movement of the mounting portion 42 of the accessory 4 , so it can be directly The accessory 4 is pulled out from the second slot 1102 in the direction from the plug base 11019 to the first hole 110181a.
  • Figure 16 shows the state when the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 are disassembled. At this time, the transmission mechanism moves under the action of the elastic force of the elastic member 110152 and restores the box cover 12 to the first rotation position, and is in a position without external force. Hover state.
  • the accessory 4 when the box cover 12 is in a closed state, the accessory 4 can be connected to the body of the storage box 1 through the snap connection with the snap-on component 11018. 11 fixed connections.
  • the connecting arm 11016 of the transmission mechanism since the connecting arm 11016 of the transmission mechanism is fixedly connected with the box cover 12, the transmission mechanism can also be driven to move by the opening of the box cover 12, so that the clamping part 11018 can move to a position that avoids the mounting part 42 of the accessory 4, Therefore, the accessory 4 can be detached from the main body 11 of the storage box 1 .
  • the assembly of the accessory 4 and the main body 11 is also realized through the opening and closing actions of the box cover 12 . Therefore, the use of the wireless audio device assembly of the present application can effectively simplify the process of disassembling and assembling the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 , so that it is convenient for the user to choose whether to carry the accessory 4 according to their own needs.
  • the structures of the attachment portions 42 of the respective accessories 4 that can realize different functions can also be unified. In this way, the user's usage requirements can be met by replacing the accessory 4, so that the user's usage experience can be improved.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a component of a wireless audio device according to a possible embodiment of the present application.
  • the specific structure of the accessory 4 can be set with reference to the above-mentioned embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the transmission mechanism may include a travel switch 110201 , which can be exposed through a through hole 110155 opened in the casing 11015 of the main body 11 . Trigger the movement of the transmission mechanism.
  • FIG. 18 shows a cross-sectional view of the assembled state of the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 .
  • the through hole 110155 for exposing the travel switch 11021 and the opening 110201 of the second slot 1102 may be disposed opposite to each other.
  • a switch box 110154 is also provided inside the casing 11015 of the main body 11 , and the switch box 110154 is covered with the through hole 110155 .
  • the travel switch 11021 may include a pressing part 110211 and a transmission part 110212, wherein at least part of the pressing part 110211 is accommodated in the switch box, and at least part of the pressing part 110211 can extend into the through hole 110155; the transmission part 110212 and the pressing part 110211 are fixed connected, and the transmission part 110212 extends from the pressing part 110211 to the inside of the housing 110155 and to the outside of the switch box 110154.
  • the end of the transmission part 110212 away from the pressing part 110211 may also be provided with a pressing part 110213, and the shape of the pressing part 110213 may be, but not limited to, a spherical shape, a column shape, and the like.
  • a buffer portion 11022 may also be provided on the side of the switch box 110154 facing the through hole 110155. After the pressing portion 110211 moves into the switch box 110154 for a set stroke, it can come into contact with the buffer portion 11022, which can The collision between the pressing part 110211 and the switch box 110154 is avoided, so that the damage between the two can be reduced.
  • the buffering portion 11022 can play a certain buffering effect on the pressing portion 110211, which is beneficial to improve the user's feeling of pressing the travel switch 11021, so as to improve the user experience.
  • the storage box 1 also includes a plug base 11019, and the specific structure of the plug base 11019 can be set with reference to the above-mentioned embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the transmission mechanism may also include a scissor foot structure 11023, the scissors foot structure 11023 includes a first snap pin 110231 and a second snap pin 110232 that are hinged with each other, and the hinge shafts 110233 of the two snap pins are fixed to the slots of the plug base 11019
  • the wall for example, can be fixed on the groove wall of the plug base 11019 close to the travel switch 11021 .
  • part of the first clip pin 110231 and the second clip pin 110232 penetrate into the insertion slot 110191 of the insertion base 11019, and the other part extends from the slot wall of the insertion base 11019 close to the travel switch 11021 to the insertion slot Outside of base 11019.
  • the end of the part of the first latching pin 110231 that penetrates into the insertion slot 110191 can be bent into the interval defined by the two latching pins to form a first hook, and the second latching pin 110232 penetrates the insertion slot
  • the end of the part in 110191 can be bent into the interval defined by the two latching pins to form the second latching hook.
  • FIG. 18 when the contact portion of the mounting portion of the accessory 4 extends into the plug base 11019 , it can be inserted into the area defined by the first snap pin 110231 and the second snap pin 110232 , and can be connected with The first hook and the second hook are engaged with each other.
  • the part of the first clip pin 110231 that penetrates into the plug base 11019 and the part of the second clip pin 110232 that penetrates into the plug base 11019 are connected by an elastic member 110234, and the elastic member 110234 can be, but not limited to, a spring, and the elastic member 110234 is in a stretched state.
  • the movement of the travel switch 11021 from the through hole 110155 into the housing 11 can increase the angle between the first latching pin 110231 and the second latching pin 110232 .
  • the pressing portion 110213 of the travel switch 11021 can be accommodated in the area defined by the portion of the first latching pin 110231 and the second latching pin 110232 that protrudes to the outside of the plug base 11019 , and the pressing portion 110213 can apply squeezing force to the two clip pins to increase the included angle between the two clip pins.
  • Fig. 19 shows the state of the scissor foot structure 11023 when the travel switch 11021 is pressed. Press the travel switch 11021, and the pressing portion 110213 of the travel switch 11021 squeezes the first latching leg 110231 and the second latching leg 110232, so that the first latching leg 110231 and the second latching leg 110232 rotate around the hinge shaft 110233 respectively , thereby increasing the angle between the first clamping pin 110231 and the second clamping pin 110232 . During this process, the elastic member 110234 is further stretched, and elastic tension is accumulated.
  • a limit portion 11024 may also be provided on the side surface of the plug base 11019 facing the travel switch 11021 .
  • the travel switch 11024 moves toward the scissor foot structure 11023 to a set travel distance
  • the travel switch 11021 cannot continue to move toward the scissor foot structure 11023, and the angle between the first latching leg 110231 and the second latching leg 110232 does not continue to increase. big.
  • the pressing portion 110213 can be prevented from directly hitting the plug base 11019, thereby effectively prolonging the service life of the travel switch 11021 and the plug base 11019.
  • the angle between the first clipping pin 110231 and the second clipping pin 110232 increases to a certain extent and does not continue to increase, which can effectively avoid the first clipping pin 110231 and the second clipping pin 110232
  • the wall of the socket 110191 of the socket base 11019 is impacted to reduce the risk of damage to the socket base 11019 .
  • the limiting portion 11024 can be a protruding structure protruding from the surface of the plug base 11019, and the height of the protrusion can be determined according to the opening of the plug base 11019 and/or the plug base 11019 is set in the inner space of the insertion slot 110191.
  • FIG. 20 shows a state in which the accessory 4 is detached from the storage box 1 .
  • the gap between the first hook 1102311 of the first clamping pin 110231 and the second hook 1102321 of the second clamping pin 110232 The gap can avoid the contact portion 4202 of the mounting portion 42 .
  • the accessory 4 can be pulled out from the second slot 1102 along the direction of the insertion base 11019 to the opening 110201 of the second slot 1102 to realize the disassembly state of the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 shown in FIG. 20 .
  • the first snap-on pin 110231 and the second snap-on pin 110232 are moved around the hinge shaft 110233 by the elastic force of the elastic member 110234 to make the space between the two Rotate in the direction of decreasing angle.
  • the first clamping pin 110231 and the second clamping pin 110232 exert a force toward the through hole 110155 on the pressing part, so that the travel switch 11021 moves toward the through hole 110155 and extends into the direction of the through hole 110155. into the through hole 110155, so that the transmission mechanism can be restored to the state shown in FIG. 18, so as to facilitate the subsequent use of the wireless audio device assembly by the user.
  • the assembly process of the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 is opposite to the above-mentioned disassembly process, which will not be repeated here.
  • the micro switch 1007 mentioned in the above embodiment can also be arranged on the side of the switch box 110154 facing the through hole 110155 .
  • the pressing portion 110211 touches the micro switch 1007 during the movement from the through hole 110155 to the switch box 110154, and the micro switch 1007 transmits the trigger signal to the main circuit board of the storage box of the storage box 1 through the connecting wire.
  • the CPU performs corresponding processing.
  • the attachment and detachment of the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 can be realized by pressing the travel switch provided on the main body 11 of the storage box 1 . Therefore, the use of the wireless audio device assembly of this embodiment can effectively simplify the process of disassembling and assembling the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 , thereby facilitating the user to choose whether to carry the accessory 4 according to their own needs.
  • the structures of the attachment portions 42 of the respective accessories 4 that can realize different functions can also be unified. In this way, the user's usage requirements can be met by replacing the accessory 4, so that the user's usage experience can be improved.
  • Fig. 21 is a schematic diagram of an assembly structure of a wireless audio device component according to another possible embodiment of the present application. It will be appreciated that wireless audio devices are omitted in FIG. 21 .
  • the above-mentioned button 10011 provided on the body 11 of the storage box 1 can be used as an accessory trigger switch.
  • the accessory trigger switch can be used to power the storage box 1 to the accessories 4, and the accessories 4 and the storage box. 1 to control the communication between them.
  • the accessory trigger switch is in an off state, and the storage box 1 stops supplying power to the accessory 4 at this time, so that zero power consumption can be achieved and power consumption can be reduced.
  • the accessory trigger switch can be turned on, so as to realize the power supply of the storage box 1 to the accessory 4 in a short time, and then the communication between the two can be realized.
  • the accessory 4 itself may not be provided with a battery, which can save the time it takes for the accessory 4 to be charged because it has not been used for a long time.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 in a disassembled state.
  • the first slot 1101 and the second slot 1102 are both disposed on the first surface 1103 of the main body 11 and are disposed close to each other. In this way, when the box cover 12 is closed, the first slot 1101 and the second slot 1102 can be hidden in the accommodating space formed by the box cover 12 and the main body 11 , which can effectively enhance the appearance of the storage box 1 as a whole. sex.
  • FIG. 23 is an enlarged view of a part of the structure at A of FIG. 22 .
  • at least one slot wall of the second slot 1102 may be provided with a first limiting structure 110202.
  • two opposite slot walls of the second slot 1102 Each is provided with a first limiting structure 110202 .
  • the mounting part 42 may include a connection part 4201 connected with the detection part 41, and a contact part 4202 provided at one end of the connection part 4201 away from the detection part 41, wherein the connection part 4201 may be connected with one end of the detection part 41, and at a
  • the connection portion 4201 may also be disposed coplanar with the detection portion 41 .
  • the plane where the contact portion 4202 is located may form a set angle with the plane where the detection portion 41 is located.
  • a second limiting structure 42021 may be disposed on the contact portion 4202, wherein the first limiting structure 110202 and the second limiting structure 42021 can be limited and snapped in a one-to-one correspondence, thereby avoiding installation on the second limiting structure 42021.
  • the contact portion 4202 of the slot 1102 swings in the plane where the first surface of the body 11 is located.
  • the first limiting structure 110202 may be a protrusion provided on the groove wall of the second slot 1102, and the second limiting structure 42021 may be a groove provided on the contact portion 4202; or Alternatively, the first limiting structure 110202 can be a groove, and the second limiting structure 42021 can be a protrusion, and the protrusion and the groove can be limited and clamped. It can be understood that, the first limiting structure 110202 and the second limiting structure 42021 may also adopt other possible arrangements, as long as the contact portion 4202 can be limited in the plane where the first surface 1103 is located.
  • the installation direction of the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 is the same as the direction in which the wireless audio device is inserted into the storage box 1
  • the direction in which the accessory 4 is removed from the storage box 1 is the same as the direction in which the wireless audio device is pulled out of the storage box 1 same.
  • FIG. 24 shows the internal structure of the storage box 1 .
  • a plurality of contacts 110192 may also be provided in the second slot 1102 , and the contacts 110192 may be in the form of contact pins, and the contact pins may extend from the body 11 of the storage box 1 to the second slot 1102 .
  • the presence detection sensor 1006 of the above-mentioned embodiment may also be in the form of a stylus. Wherein, the stylus serving as the contact point 110192 and the stylus serving as the presence detection sensor 1006 can adopt the same package form, which is beneficial to simplify the internal structure of the storage box 1 . Referring to FIG.
  • the contacts 110192 can be connected to the cable connection seat 11071 of the main circuit board 1107 of the storage box through a flexible cable 11020 (eg, a flexible flexible cable).
  • a flexible cable 11020 eg, a flexible flexible cable.
  • An interface module 1108 is also provided on the main circuit board 1107 of the storage box, and the interface module 1108 can be used as a charging interface, so as to be used for charging the storage box 1 .
  • the specific number of the contacts 110192 is not limited, for example, it may be three as shown in FIG. 23 .
  • One of the three contacts 110192 can be connected with the positive power line, one can be connected with the negative power line, and the other can be connected with the communication line, so as to realize simple functions of power supply and communication.
  • more contacts 110192 may be provided, and each contact 110192 may be connected to the main circuit board 1107 of the storage box through a lead.
  • FIG. 25 shows a schematic structural diagram of the accessory 4 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the contact portion 4202 is provided with a plurality of contact areas 42021, and the plurality of contact areas 42021 can be provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the contacts 110192 in the second slot 1102 of the main body 11 shown in FIG. 23 .
  • the number of the contact areas 42021 and the contacts 110192 can also be different.
  • the number of the contacts 110192 is greater than the number of the contact areas 42021, so that each contact area 42021 can also be in contact with the corresponding contact 110192.
  • the communication connection is performed so that the corresponding function can be realized.
  • FIG. 26 shows a schematic structural diagram of a contact circuit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the contact area 42021 may be formed by, but is not limited to, a pad, and the pad is an exposed copper pad of the accessory 4 that contacts the circuit board 40011 .
  • the contact circuit board 40011 can be arranged on the contact portion 4202, and a cable socket 40012 is left on the contact circuit board 40011.
  • One end of the wire 40013 is connected to the cable socket 40012, and the other end is connected to the accessory main circuit board through the circuit board socket 40014. 40015 on.
  • the accessory main circuit board 40015 can be located in the housing 44 of the detection part of the accessory 4 , and the detection part can be sealed by the rear housing 45 buckled to the housing 44 , and the rear housing 45 can be made of soft rubber or silicone material. In this way, after the accessory 4 is assembled with the storage box 1 , the rear shell 45 can be in contact with the storage box 1 , thereby reducing the friction when the two are in contact, thereby reducing the wear on the storage box 1 .
  • FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of a wireless audio device assembly according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • a first magnet 46 may also be provided in the housing 44 of the detection portion of the accessory 4
  • a second magnet may be further provided in the housing 11015 of the storage box 1 .
  • the second magnet 110153 can be disposed on the inner side of the side wall of the housing 11015 of the storage box 1 for being fitted with the detection part 41 of the accessory 4 .
  • the magnetic poles of the first magnet 46 and the second magnet 110153 are set to be opposite, so that the first magnet 46 and the second magnet 110153 can be adsorbed in space, thereby preventing the accessories 4 from falling off the storage box 1 .
  • the first magnet 46 may be disposed at one end of the detection portion 41 away from the contact portion 4202 to improve the reliability of the connection between the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 .
  • the number of the first magnets 46 and the second magnets 11015 is not limited, and they can be specifically set according to the accessories 4 and the space of the storage box 1 .
  • the shapes of the first magnet 46 and the second magnet 11015 may be regular shapes such as circles, squares, and sectors, or irregular shapes, and the shapes of the two may be the same or different.
  • FIG. 27 shows the positional relationship between the box cover 12 and the contact portion 4202 of the accessory 4 when the box cover 12 is closed. It can be seen that when the box cover 12 is closed, the contact portion 4202 can be squeezed and limited, so that the shaking of the contact portion 4202 can be reduced, and the accessory 4 can be prevented from falling off the storage box 1 .
  • a compressible and deformable waterproof structure such as foam, can also be provided on the portion of the box cover 12 that is used for contacting the contact portion 4202, so as to improve the sealing performance of the contact portion between the two, The wear of the connecting part 4202 by the box cover 12 is reduced.
  • the wireless audio device assembly of the above-mentioned embodiment of the present application by performing a limit design between the second slot 1102 and the contact portion 4202 of the accessory 4, a stable connection between the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 can be achieved, and the other The connection structure between them is relatively simple.
  • the contact area 42021 of the accessory 4 is communicatively connected, which can support the multifunctional expansion and flexible configuration of the accessory 4, so that the accessories 4 including different functional modules can be contacted
  • the structure of the part 4202 is uniformly designed, so that the user can replace the accessories 4 according to their own needs, which is beneficial to improve the user's use experience.
  • the wireless audio device assembly can meet the needs of various users, and it can avoid developing multiple sets of different storage boxes 1 (with 4 ports of accessories, 4 ports without accessories, and 4 ports with different accessories), and saves the overall cost.
  • FIG. 28 shows a circuit system for charging the accessories 4 by the storage box 1 provided by a possible embodiment of the present application.
  • the storage box 1 charges the accessory 4
  • it needs to pass through the analog switch 10015 and the conduction of the analog switch 10015 is controlled by the CPU 10010 of the storage box 1 .
  • the analog switch 10015 and the battery 1001 are controlled to be turned on by the CPU 10010, and the connection line formed by the analog switch 10015 and the battery 1001 is used as a power cord to charge the accessory 4.
  • the corresponding relationship table between the charging power required by different accessories 4 and the time can be stored in the storage box 1 . In this way, it can be timed according to the type of the accessory 4.
  • the CPU 10010 disconnects the connection between the analog switch 10015 and the battery 1001, and the analog switch 10015 is switched to conduct with the digital pin of the CPU 10010. status, the connection line can be used for data transmission.
  • an analog switch 40020 is also provided, and the default state of the analog switch 40020 is to conduct with the supercapacitor 4008 and store electricity.
  • the positive pole of the supercapacitor 4008 is connected to the comparator 40017.
  • the comparator 40017 judges that the voltage of the supercapacitor 4008 exceeds the set value, it means that the battery is fully charged.
  • the comparator 40017 controls the analog switch 40020 to switch to the digital pin of the accessory 4.
  • the state of exemplarily, can be switched to the state of being turned on with the memory 400104 or the driver 400105 for data transmission and reception.
  • the power supply positive line and the data communication line between the accessories 4 and the storage box 1 can be multiplexed through the analog switch, thereby reducing the difference between the two.
  • the complexity of the inter-connection interface can be improved, thereby improving the reliability of the system.
  • FIG. 29 is a block diagram of a circuit system of a storage box 1 according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the circuit system of the storage box 1 may include the CPU 10010, the memory 1008, the battery 1001, the switch tube 10013, the accessory interface 10012, the micro switch 1007, the status indicator 1005 and the communication module 1002 in the above embodiment.
  • the memory 1008, the switch tube 10013, the micro switch 1007, the status indicator 1005, and the power management module 1004 can all be directly communicated with the CPU 10010, and the power management module 1004 can provide monitoring of the power of the battery 1001 and monitoring of the charging process. Management; the CPU 10010 can control the switch tube 10013 to be turned on, so that the battery 1001 can charge the accessory 4 through the accessory interface.
  • the communication module 1002 adopts ultrasonic carrier communication hardware
  • the ultrasonic carrier communication hardware may include a digital-to-analog converter 10023 , a voltage-controlled oscillator 10024 and an ultrasonic generator 10025 .
  • the digital-to-analog converter 10023 can be used to convert the digital signal in the CPU 10010 into an analog signal
  • the voltage-controlled oscillator 10024 is used to modulate the analog signal to the ultrasonic range, usually >18KHz oscillator signal
  • ultrasonic generator 10025 can be used to transmit the modulated signal to the outside.
  • the range that the human ear can hear is about 20Hz-20KHz, but this range varies from person to person and is related to the sound intensity level of the sound. Usually, around 20KHz, there is a small range of sound intensity that can be heard by the human ear. In addition, referring to FIG. 30 , with the increase of age, the hearing of the human ear will also suffer from frequency loss, and most adults have already suffered a large loss of hearing around 20KHz, and cannot hear the sound of this frequency.
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic structural diagram of components of a wireless audio device 2 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication module modulates the signal through ultrasonic waves and transmits it to the outside, so as to realize simplex communication. Since the frequency range of the sound waves received by the microphone 2002 is generally slightly larger than the hearing range of the human ear, the terminal device (such as a wireless audio device) containing the microphone 2002 can receive the ultrasonic modulated signal.
  • the CPU 10010 at the 1 end of the storage box modulates the signal to be sent to the ultrasonic frequency band, and selects the frequency range of 18KHz-20KHz as the carrier frequency, wherein the frequency of the ultrasonic wave varies with the amplitude of the transmission signal. Variety.
  • the wireless audio equipment or other terminal equipment at the receiving end usually has a sampling rate of 44.1KHz or 48KHz, and sampling the ultrasonic signal with the highest frequency of 20KHz satisfies the Nyquist sampling law. After that, through the filtering and signal processing of the software at the receiving end, the demodulation can be completed, and the transmitted data can be parsed.
  • the wireless audio device assembly may further include a protective shell 5 .
  • FIG. 32 shows the structure of the protective case 5 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the protective shell 5 may include a first cover body 51 and a second cover body 52 , wherein the first cover body 51 can be sleeved on the body 11 of the storage box 1 , and the second cover body 52 can be sleeved on the box cover 12 .
  • the material of the protective shell 5 can be, but not limited to, plastic or silicone, so that the protective shell 5 can protect the storage box 1 and the accessories 4 while making the protective shell 5 and the storage box 1 more convenient.
  • the outer contour of the outer casing 5 can be prevented from falling off from the storage box 1 .
  • magnets may also be provided at corresponding positions of the protective shell 5 and the storage box 1, so as to improve the reliability of the connection between the two through the adsorption effect between the magnets.
  • the number and position of the magnets in the protective shell 5 and the storage box 1 can be specifically set according to their space.
  • the shapes of the magnets in the protective shell 5 and the storage box 1 can be regular shapes such as circle, square, fan, etc., or irregular shapes, and the shapes of the magnets in the protective shell 5 and the storage box 1 can be the same or different. .
  • the first sleeve body 51 may also be provided with a snap-fit slot 511 , and the detection portion 41 of the accessory 4 in the above-mentioned embodiment can be snap-fitted with the snap-fit slot 511 , so that the The accessories 4 installed in the storage box 1 are limited to improve the reliability of the connection between the accessories 4 and the storage box 1 .
  • a functional module (not shown in the figure) may also be provided in the first cover body 51 of the protective shell 5 , and set on the first cover body 51
  • the connection interface 512, the functional module can be connected to the storage box in communication through the connection interface 512.
  • the first body 51 may be, but not limited to, integrated with music playback control buttons, LED lights, an infrared signal remote controller, and sensing function modules such as a temperature sensor, a vibration sensor, and an electrocardiogram sensor.
  • the protective shell 5 can also be used as an accessory, which is not bound to the storage box 1 in terms of cost, and is flexible and controllable.
  • the first sleeve body 51 can communicate with the main body 11 of the storage box 1 through the connection interface 512 , there is no need to install an independent battery in the protective shell 5 .
  • the cost of the protective shell 5 can be effectively reduced, and the design requirements of miniaturization, lightness and thinness can be met.
  • the communication connection between the first sleeve body 51 and the main body 11 can be set with reference to the communication connection between the accessory 4 and the storage box 1 in any of the above-mentioned embodiments, which will not be described here.
  • connection interface 512 of the first sleeve body 51 can be arranged in the cavity of the first sleeve body 51 , so that the connection interface 512 can be invisible from the outside, so that the protective shell 5 A hidden connection is made with the storage box 1 on the basis of not affecting the appearance of the wireless audio device assembly and the protective shell 5 .
  • the specific structure of the connection interface 512 can be set with reference to the mounting portion of the accessory in the above-mentioned embodiment, and details are not described here. In this way, the connection interface 512 can also be inserted into the second slot of the main body 11 of the storage box 1 to realize the communication connection between the first sleeve body 51 and the storage box 1 .
  • the second slot can be used as a general interface, which can be adapted to both the accessory 4 and the connection interface 512 of the first sleeve body 51 , so as to effectively simplify the structure of the storage box 1 .
  • the connection interface 512 can be made of a flexible material, so that the connection interface 512 can be bent to the outside of the first sleeve body 51 , thereby facilitating the connection between the connection interface 512 and the body 11 of the storage box 1 .
  • the circuit board disposed at the connection interface 512 may be a flexible printed circuit (FPC), so as to effectively improve the reliability of the circuit board structure.
  • FPC flexible printed circuit
  • coils can also be arranged in the first sleeve body 51.
  • coils can also be arranged in the main body 1 of the storage box 1, so that the first sleeve body 51 can be paired with its own coils.
  • the main body 11 of the storage box 1 can be charged and communicated; the main body 11 of the storage box 1 can also be charged and communicated with the first sleeve body 51 through its own coil, so that the first sleeve body 51 and the main body of the storage box 1 can be charged. Two-way charging and communication are realized between 11 through the coil.
  • the accessory in the embodiments of the present application refers to a portable device that integrates at least one sensor to realize certain functions, for example, an accessory that integrates a heart rate sensor to realize heart rate detection.
  • the hardware structure of the storage box is described below.
  • the storage box 100 may include a processor 110, a memory 120, a communication module 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, a sensor module 150, a wireless audio device interface 160, an accessory interface 170, and buttons 180, indicator 181, micro switch 182, display screen 190.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example, the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processor (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) Wait. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
  • the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the storage box 100 . The controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction operation code and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
  • a memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in processor 110 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have just been used or recycled by the processor 110 . If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided and the latency of the processor 110 is reduced, thereby increasing the efficiency of the system.
  • Memory 120 may be used to store computer-executable program code, which includes instructions.
  • the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the storage box 100 by executing the instructions stored in the memory 120 .
  • the memory 120 may include a stored program area and a stored data area.
  • the storage program area may store the operating system, and the software code of at least one application (eg, iQIYI application, WeChat application, etc.).
  • the storage data area can store data (eg, images, videos, etc.) and the like generated during the use of the storage box 100 .
  • the memory 121 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (UFS), and the like.
  • the communication module 130 can provide wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) networks), bluetooth (BT), and short-range wireless communication applied on the storage box 100 .
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • BT Bluetooth
  • short-range wireless communication applied on the storage box 100 .
  • Technology near field communication, NFC
  • ultrasonic carrier communication module and other wireless communication solutions.
  • the communication module 130 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
  • the power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140, and supplies power to the processor 110, the memory 120, the communication module 130, and the like.
  • the sensor module 150 may include a touch sensor and the like. Among them, the touch sensor 151 is also called “touch panel”. The touch sensor may be disposed on the display screen 190 , and the touch sensor 151 and the display screen 190 form a touch screen, also referred to as a “touch screen”. The touch sensor 151 is used to detect a touch operation applied on or near it. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event. Visual output related to touch operations may be provided through display screen 190 . In other embodiments, the touch sensor 151 may also be disposed on the surface of the storage box 100 , which is different from the position where the display screen 190 is located.
  • the wireless audio device interface 160 may include two interfaces for connecting two wireless audio devices, such as connecting two headphones.
  • the accessory interface 170 is used to connect required accessories, such as accessories for detecting heart rate, accessories for measuring blood pressure, and the like.
  • the pairing button 180 is used to pair the wireless audio device with an external terminal device, or pair an accessory with a storage box, and the like.
  • the pairing key 180 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch key.
  • the storage box 100 can receive key inputs, and generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function control of the storage box 100 .
  • the indicator 181 can be an indicator light, which can be used to indicate a charging state, a change in power, or a message, a notification, and the like.
  • the micro switch 182 is used for pairing connection between the accessory and the storage box 100 .
  • the display screen 190 is used to display battery level information and the like.
  • the display screen 190 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode or an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light).
  • LED organic light-emitting diode
  • AMOLED organic light-emitting diode
  • FLED flexible light-emitting diode
  • Miniled MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light-emitting diode (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED) and so on.
  • the storage box 100 may include 1 or N display screens 190 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • FIG. 34 do not constitute a specific limitation on the storage box, and the storage box may also include more or less components than those shown in the figure, or combine some components, or disassemble some components, Or a different component arrangement.
  • the storage box 100 shown in FIG. 34 is used as an example for description.
  • this application scenario may include a wireless audio device component 21 and a terminal device 22 .
  • the wireless audio device assembly 21 may include a storage box 211 , a wireless audio device 212 , and accessories 213 .
  • the wireless audio device component 21 can establish a communication connection with the terminal device 22 through a communication network.
  • the communication network may be a local area network, such as a Wi-Fi hotspot network, a wireless fidelity-peer to peer (Wi-Fi P2P) network, a Bluetooth network, a zigbee network, or an NFC network, etc.
  • Wi-Fi P2P wireless fidelity-peer to peer
  • a Bluetooth network such as Bluetooth
  • zigbee network such as Bluetooth
  • NFC network such as Wi-Fi P2P
  • a wireless connection between the multiple devices may also be established based on a mobile network, for example, the mobile network includes a mobile network established based on 2G, 3G, 4G, 5G and subsequent standard protocols.
  • the plurality of devices may also establish a connection with at least one server through a mobile network, and each device transmits data, and/or messages, and/or information, and/or information through the server. order, and/or order.
  • the multiple devices may also be connected through data lines.
  • the wireless audio device components involved in the embodiments of the present application are storage devices including wireless audio devices and accessories.
  • the wireless audio device component may specifically include four working modes: a wireless audio device working mode, a wireless audio device pairing mode, an accessory pairing mode, and an accessory working mode.
  • working modes in the embodiments of the present application may include but are not limited to the above four modes, and may also be other working modes, which are not specifically limited in the present application.
  • FIG. 36 it is a schematic diagram of transition between working modes provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the wireless audio device can be triggered to be in the wireless audio device pairing mode or the accessory can be triggered to be in the accessory working mode through the pairing button; the accessory can be triggered to be in the accessory pairing mode through the micro switch.
  • the above four working modes are described in detail below.
  • the first working mode wireless audio device working mode
  • the working mode of the wireless audio device may be the working mode that the wireless audio device is in most of the time.
  • the storage box mainly charges wireless audio devices.
  • the second working mode wireless audio device pairing mode
  • this mode can be understood as a working mode in which the wireless audio device is paired and connected with an external terminal device.
  • the user can long press the pairing button on the storage box, and then when the color of the indicator light of the pairing button changes, the external terminal device can search for the wireless audio device through Bluetooth, and then use the pairing code and the wireless audio device. Pair the audio device. It should be understood that after the user presses the pairing button for a preset period of time (for example, 2 seconds), the color of the indicator light may change.
  • the third working mode accessory pairing mode
  • this mode can be understood as a working mode in which the accessory is paired with the storage box.
  • FIG. 37A a schematic diagram of a user interface for pairing an accessory with a storage box according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the external terminal device such as a mobile phone
  • the mobile phone can display the display shown in Figure 37A.
  • User interface 40 shown.
  • the micro switch can be triggered, and the accessory can be connected to the storage box at this time, for example, the user interface 41 can be displayed.
  • the user interface 41 can display the form of the storage box to which the accessories are connected.
  • the user interface 42 may be displayed on the mobile phone.
  • the user interface 42 may include a prompt box 421, and the prompt box 421 may include power information 422 of the device connected to the storage box, prompt information 423 indicating successful connection, and the like.
  • the user interface 42 may also display accessories, wireless audio devices, storage boxes, etc., and may display the actual shape of accessories, the actual shape of wireless audio devices, and the actual shape of storage boxes, which are not limited in this application.
  • the accessory when the accessory is connected to the storage box, it can be understood that the accessory establishes a physical connection and a communication connection with the storage box.
  • the accessory when there is a Bluetooth module on the accessory, the accessory can also be paired and connected with the storage box through Bluetooth.
  • the micro switch when the user opens the box cover of the storage box, and as the opening angle of the box cover of the storage box increases, the micro switch can be triggered, and the user interface can be switched from the user interface 40 to the user interface 43 at this time.
  • a prompt box 431 may be displayed in the user interface 43
  • a “connect” button 432 and a “cancel” button 433 may be displayed in the prompt box 431 .
  • the form of the storage box to which the accessories are connected can also be displayed.
  • the user may then click the "connect” button 432, the phone may respond to the user's click, and when the user connects the accessory to the storage box of the wireless audio device, the phone may display a user interface 44, which may include a prompt box 441 , the prompt box 441 may include accessories 442 , wireless audio devices 443 , storage boxes 444 , and prompt information 445 .
  • the prompt information 445 may be "connecting".
  • the dotted box in the user interface 42 is only for illustration, and may not be displayed when the actual product is realized. It should be understood that the interface shown in FIG. 37A is only a schematic illustration, and when an actual product is implemented, the content displayed on the interface may also be more or less than the content shown in the above schematic diagram, for example, the specific functions of accessories, The operation mode, etc., is not limited in this application.
  • the accessory pairing mode is based on the wireless audio device pairing mode, that is, before pairing the accessory with the storage box, the wireless audio device needs to be paired with the external terminal device.
  • the wireless audio device needs to be paired with the external terminal device.
  • the fourth working mode accessories working mode
  • the user can control the accessory to enter the accessory working mode by operating the pairing button on the storage box.
  • the user can double-click the pairing button, and then the indicator light on the storage box flashes to indicate that the accessory working mode is entered.
  • the indicator light in the accessory working mode may also flash at a certain frequency, for example, a frequency denoted as the second frequency (for example, 1 time/1S). That is, the blinking frequency of the indicator light in accessory pairing mode is different from the blinking frequency of the indicator light in accessory working mode.
  • the flashing color of the indicator light in the accessory pairing mode may also be different from the flashing color of the indicator light in the accessory working mode, which is not limited in this application.
  • FIG. 37B a flowchart of a method for pairing an accessory with a storage box provided by an embodiment of the present application is shown in FIG. 37B .
  • the method may include the following steps:
  • step S401 The storage box detects whether the micro switch is triggered. If the micro switch is triggered, go to step S402.
  • the micro switch when the user rotates the box cover of the earphone box to a certain angle (for example, the angle is greater than 90 degrees), the micro switch can be triggered. It should be noted that the micro switch is triggered when the accessory is connected to the storage box or when the accessory is taken out of the storage box.
  • S402 The storage box charges the accessories so that the accessories can work normally.
  • the accessory can be connected to the storage box, and then the storage box can turn on the switch for charging control, so that the current can flow from the connection interface to the accessory, so that the accessory can be charged, so as to ensure that the accessory can be charged. works fine. It should be understood that when the accessory is paired with the storage box for the first time, there is no power on the accessory. At this time, the accessory can be charged. For example, the accessory can be charged for T1 time, and then the charging control switch can be turned off after T1 time.
  • the storage box can also continue to charge the accessory until the power of the accessory reaches 100%, and then the charging can be stopped, which is not limited in this application.
  • the indicator light on the storage box can flash at a certain frequency, such as the first frequency (for example, 1 time/2S), to indicate that the accessory is connected to the storage box.
  • the box enters the pairing process.
  • the value of the charging duration T1 may depend on the duration of the time for the wireless audio device component to search for the type of accessories. For example, after the accessory enters the accessory working mode, it can search for the type of the accessory, that is, the code of the accessory. If the code time for searching the accessory is t1, the charging time of the accessory can refer to the time for searching the code of the accessory. It should be noted that the embodiment of the present application does not limit the relationship between t1 and T1. For example, when the coding time t1 for finding accessories is relatively short, the time T1 for charging the accessories can be equal to t1. Of course, T1 can also be greater than t1. .
  • S403 The storage box detects whether the accessory data can be received. If the accessory data can be received, continue to execute S404.
  • the accessory data may include the code of the accessory, the type of the accessory, the firmware version information of the accessory, the status information of the accessory (whether it is abnormal), the production time of the accessory, and the like. It should be understood that, in this embodiment, data can be transmitted between the storage box and the accessories through the connection lines between the electrical contacts inside the storage box.
  • the storage box in order to detect whether the storage box and the accessory can communicate normally, can send a message to the accessory. If the accessory can receive the message and can feed back the corresponding message to the storage box, it means the storage box There is normal communication between the box and accessories.
  • the storage box may send an instruction to read the code of the accessory to the accessory.
  • the accessory after receiving the read instruction, can feed back the code of the accessory to the storage box.
  • the storage box can save the accessory data, that is, the pairing information between the accessory and the storage box. It should be noted that, during this process, the indicator light of the storage box can keep flashing, and the indicator light can be turned off until the storage box has finished storing the accessory data.
  • the storage box does not receive accessory data in S403, it means that the accessory is faulty or the accessory is not connected to the storage box, etc.
  • the indicator light of the storage box can flash red, and then turn off the indicator light after T2. That is, when the accessory data is not received and the indicator light flashes red, it means that the pairing of the storage box and the accessory fails.
  • the storage box may compare the read accessory data with the accessory data in the stored pairing information, and determine whether the read accessory data is the same as the accessory data in the stored pairing information. If the read accessory data is the same as the stored accessory data, it means that the accessory has been paired with the storage box of the wireless audio device, and the accessory can work normally. If the read accessory data is different from the stored accessory data, the accessory is faulty, and the paired state can be reset to the unpaired state.
  • the indicator light of the storage box can flash red light, for example, it can flash for T2 time, and turn off the indicator after T2 time. lamp.
  • S404 The storage box receives a first operation, where the first operation is used to trigger the accessory to enter the accessory working mode.
  • the first operation may be: double-clicking the pairing button, triple-clicking the pairing button, lightly pressing and long-pressing the pairing button, etc., which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • S406 The storage box receives the detection data of the accessories.
  • the storage box after receiving the detection data of the accessory sent by the accessory, the storage box can send the detection data of the accessory to the wireless audio device or the external terminal device.
  • the specific data transmission process will be described in detail below, and will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 37B is only introduced by taking one accessory as an example, and the method of pairing other accessories with the storage box can be referred to the method of the embodiment shown in FIG. 37B , which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 38A it is a schematic diagram of communication between a wireless audio device and a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication between the wireless audio device and the terminal device may include the following two ways:
  • the first type the wireless audio equipment and the terminal equipment are respectively connected to transmit data synchronously.
  • the wireless audio device is an example of an earphone.
  • two earphones can establish a connection with the mobile phone through Bluetooth, and then simultaneously transmit data with the mobile phone through Bluetooth.
  • a wireless audio device establishes a connection with the terminal device and another wireless audio device at the same time. For example, as shown in (b) of FIG. 38A , the headset 1 establishes a connection with the mobile phone through Bluetooth, and then the headset 1 establishes a Bluetooth connection with the headset 2 .
  • one channel of data is transmitted between an earphone and a terminal device.
  • the left channel data is transmitted between the earphone 1 and the terminal device.
  • Right channel data is transmitted between end devices.
  • monaural data is transmitted between two earphones, and two-channel data is transmitted between the earphone connected to the terminal device, such as earphone 1, and the terminal device.
  • FIG. 38A only takes Bluetooth as an example. In practical applications, other communication methods, such as near field magnetic induction (NFMI), may also be used.
  • NFMI near field magnetic induction
  • L in FIG. 38A represents left channel data
  • R represents right channel data.
  • the detection data of the accessory can be obtained in the following ways:
  • the first way You can take out the accessories from the storage box by triggering the micro switch, and then use the accessories in the offline state of the accessories to obtain the detection data of the accessories. Next, after using the accessories to obtain the detection data of the accessories, connect the accessories to the storage box, and then send the detection data of the accessories to the storage box.
  • the second way without removing the accessories from the storage box, use the accessories directly through the storage box with accessories, obtain the detection data of the accessories, and then send the detection data of the accessories to the storage box.
  • Scenario 1 There is no Bluetooth communication module on the storage box.
  • the detection data of the accessory can be sent to the storage box that has been paired and connected with the accessory first, and then stored in the storage box.
  • the box then transmits the detection data of the accessory to the wireless audio device placed in the storage box, and finally the wireless audio device placed in the storage box transmits the detection data of the accessory to another wireless audio device outside the storage box.
  • FIG. 38B it is assumed that the earphone 1 is placed in the storage box, and the earphone 2 is worn by the user.
  • the detection data of the accessory can be sent to the earphone 1 through the storage box, and then the earphone 1 transmits the detection data of the accessory to the earphone 2 through Bluetooth.
  • FIG. 38C a flowchart of a method for transmitting accessory detection data provided by an embodiment of the present application is shown in FIG. 38C .
  • the method may include the following steps:
  • FIG. 38C is a process of transmitting the accessory detection data to the wireless audio device after the storage box receives the accessory detection data.
  • S501 The storage box determines whether there is a wireless audio device in the storage box. If there is a wireless audio device in the storage box, continue to execute S502.
  • the indicator light of the storage box can flash red, for example, it can flash for T2 time.
  • S502 The storage box sends the detection data of the accessory to the wireless audio device in the storage box.
  • S503 The wireless audio device in the storage box sends the detection data of the accessory to the wireless audio device outside the storage box.
  • the storage box sends the detection data of the accessory to the earphone in the storage box, and then the earphone in the storage box sends the detection data of the accessory to the earphone outside the storage box, so that the user can wear
  • the headset receives the accessory's detection data.
  • the detection data of the accessory can be played on the earphone outside the storage box by means of voice broadcast.
  • the detection data of the accessory may include numbers (for example, a body temperature of 36.7 degrees Celsius obtained by measuring the temperature), sounds (for example, the sound of a heartbeat), and the like.
  • the wireless audio device can convert the detection data of the accessory into an audio signal that the user can hear.
  • the wireless audio device can send the detection data of the accessory to an external terminal device, such as a mobile phone, and then the mobile phone converts the detection data of the accessory into an audio signal, and finally the mobile phone transmits the audio signal to the audio signal.
  • an external terminal device such as a mobile phone
  • the primary and secondary divisions of the wireless audio device are determined through negotiation by the wireless audio device.
  • the earphone in the storage box may be the main earphone, and the earphone outside the storage box may be the secondary earphone.
  • the storage box The earphones inside can also be the secondary earphones, and the earphones outside the storage box can be the main earphones.
  • the earphones inside the storage box are the main earphones, and the earphones outside the storage box are the secondary earphones.
  • the storage box can determine whether the main and auxiliary wireless audio devices can communicate normally. If the main and auxiliary wireless audio devices cannot communicate normally, the indicator lights of the wireless audio device components can Blinking red light, for example, it can blink for T2 time.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 38C is only an illustration.
  • the detection data of the accessory can be sent to the The storage box that is paired and connected with the accessories, and then the storage box transmits the detection data of the accessories to the wireless audio device placed in the storage box, and finally the wireless audio device sends the detection data of the accessories to the terminal that has been paired with the wireless audio device. equipment.
  • the headset 1 located in the storage box and the mobile phone can communicate through Bluetooth, and the headset 1 can communicate with the headset 2 through a mono channel. transfer data.
  • the earphone 1 located in the storage box can transmit data through a single channel, such as the left channel, with the mobile phone, and the earphone 2 located outside the storage box can pass between the mobile phone and the mobile phone.
  • Mono such as the right channel transmits data.
  • At least one wireless audio device must be placed in the storage box before the detection data of the accessory can be transmitted to the wireless audio device or the terminal device.
  • Scenario 2 There is a Bluetooth communication module on the storage box.
  • the detection data of the accessory may be transmitted to the external terminal device through a communication module, such as a Bluetooth module, on the storage box.
  • a communication module such as a Bluetooth module
  • both wireless audio devices can be placed outside the storage box, or one wireless audio device can be placed in the storage box, and the other wireless audio device can be placed outside the storage box (which can be worn by the user). ).
  • the following is an example of two wireless audio devices placed outside the storage box to introduce the transmission process of the detection data of the accessories.
  • the Bluetooth module on the storage box can be turned off to save power consumption and achieve energy saving. effect of electricity.
  • a connection is established between two earphones through Bluetooth, and mono data is transmitted; a communication connection is established between the main earphone and the mobile phone through Bluetooth, and dual channel data is transmitted.
  • a communication connection can be established between the Bluetooth module on the storage box and the auxiliary headset, so that the detection data of the accessory can be transmitted through the storage box and the auxiliary headset.
  • the Bluetooth communication link between them is transmitted to the secondary headset.
  • the detection data of the accessory can be transmitted to the main earphone through one channel in the two channels, and then the main earphone can then be regenerated. Transfer the detection data of the accessory to the mobile phone.
  • the detection data of the accessory can be transmitted through one of the two channels, and the audio of the music can be transmitted through the other channel. data, so that the user can hear the detection data of the accessory through the headset.
  • the data in the embodiment of the present application is not limited to sound signals, for example, the data transmitted in this scenario may be accessory data, specifically, the detection data of the accessory.
  • the Bluetooth module on the storage box can be turned on at the same time to ensure the storage box. Communication with wireless audio devices is possible via a Bluetooth link.
  • the storage box can directly establish a connection with the terminal device through Bluetooth, and then the storage box transmits the detection data of the accessory to the terminal device through the Bluetooth link.
  • the storage box can transmit the detection data of the accessory to the mobile phone through Bluetooth, and the two earphones are connected to the mobile phone to transmit the data synchronously.
  • the communication module (specifically, a Bluetooth module) on the storage box can establish a connection with the terminal device
  • a control button can be integrated on the accessory, and then the control button on the accessory can be used to Control smart home and other devices.
  • the connection between the terminal device and the storage box is established through Bluetooth, and then the connection between the terminal device and the smart home can be established through a wireless local area network (WLAN) network.
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • the user can operate the control button on the accessory, the accessory can generate the corresponding control command according to the user's operation, and then the accessory can send the control command to the storage box, the storage box then sends the control command to the terminal device, and finally the terminal device sends the control command. for the smart home.
  • the smart home after the smart home receives the control command, it can perform operations corresponding to the control command according to the control command, so that the smart home can be controlled by accessories, compared to the control of the smart home on the operation interface of the terminal device in the prior art.
  • the home method is more convenient.
  • FIG. 40A a schematic diagram of an application scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • accessories are installed on the storage box, and the accessories may include multiple control buttons.
  • the storage box and terminal devices such as tablet computers, mobile phones, and smart TVs
  • the TV can be connected to the smart home (for example, smart curtains, routers, smart speakers, smart electric cookers) through Wi-Fi.
  • the smart speaker is playing music, and the user can control the volume of the smart speaker through the "+" and "-" buttons on the accessory.
  • the storage box After receiving the control command, the storage box sends the control command to the mobile phone, and the mobile phone sends the control command to the smart speaker.
  • the smart speaker After the smart speaker receives the control command, it can increase the volume of the music currently being played by the smart speaker according to the control command.
  • terminal device and the smart home in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 40A are only an example, which is not limited in this application.
  • At least one sensor for health measurement may be integrated on the accessory, for example, a sensor for auscultation, a heart rate sensor, a pressure pulse sensor, a human body Temperature sensor, ECG sensor, etc.
  • the schematic diagrams shown in (a) and (b) in FIG. 40B are a left view and a front view of the storage box with accessories connected thereto, respectively.
  • the schematic diagram shown in (c) of FIG. 40B is a schematic structural diagram of an accessory for auscultation.
  • the piezoelectric sensor is a sensor used to realize auscultation function.
  • the sound insulation material filled in the upper and lower parts of the piezoelectric sensor is to reduce the noise introduced by the accessory shell, and the sound insulation material is filled between the support structure and the printed circuit board to reduce the noise.
  • FIG. 40C it is a schematic diagram of the user performing auscultation through the storage box.
  • the storage box in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 40C can be connected with an accessory with auscultation function, the user can place the storage box on the chest, and then the accessory can collect the sound signals emitted by the user's body, such as heartbeat sound, breathing sound, etc., And transmit the collected sound signal to the storage box.
  • the sound signal can be filtered and noise-reduced by the processor of the receiving box.
  • the storage box transmits the processed sound signal to the earphone, and the earphone plays the auscultation audio.
  • auxiliary sensors may include sensors: acceleration sensor, gyro sensor, photoelectric proximity sensor, vibration sensor, and the like.
  • sensors may also be integrated on the accessory, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • auxiliary sensor may also be integrated on the storage box, which is not limited in this application.
  • FIG. 40D it is a schematic flowchart of a health measurement using an accessory according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the auxiliary sensor can collect auxiliary sensing data, and then judge the validity of the signal to judge whether the user's operation is correct and reasonable.
  • the processor of the storage box can call the voice library, and then select the corresponding voice prompt from the pre-stored multiple voice prompts according to the collected auxiliary sensor data, and send the voice prompt through the wireless audio device. Play it to guide the user in operating the measurement.
  • the gyro sensor can detect whether the posture of the user holding the storage box is stable. Specifically, the gyro sensor can send the detected sensing data to the storage box, and then the storage box can compare the sensing data detected by the gyro sensor with the pre-stored sensing data.
  • the difference between the sensing data detected this time and the pre-stored sensing data is within the set range, it can be considered that the user's posture holding the storage box is stable; if the sensing data detected this time is different from the pre-stored sensing data If the difference value of the sensory data is not within the set range, it can be considered that the posture of the user holding the storage box is unstable.
  • the sensing data of the auxiliary sensor may be pre-stored in the storage box under the condition that the user operates correctly.
  • the health parameter sensor can collect health sensing data, and then diagnose the health sensing data through a diagnostic algorithm to obtain a diagnosis result.
  • the processor of the storage box can call the voice library, and then select the corresponding voice prompt from the pre-stored multiple voice prompts according to the collected health sensor data (for example, the heart does not show abnormality this time), and finally pass The wireless audio device plays the measurement results of this health measurement.
  • the storage box when there is a Bluetooth communication module on the storage box, the storage box can communicate with the external terminal device through Bluetooth, and at this time the storage box can collect the sensor data collected from the auxiliary sensor and/or the health sensor. The data is sent to the external terminal device, and the external terminal device diagnoses the sensor data through the diagnostic algorithm to obtain the diagnosis result, and then sends the diagnosis result to the wireless audio device, and finally the wireless audio device broadcasts the diagnosis result.
  • FIG. 40E a flowchart of a health measurement method provided by an embodiment of the present application, referring to FIG. 40E , the method may include the following steps:
  • auxiliary sensing data may be denoted as “first data”
  • health sensing data may be denoted as “second data”.
  • S701 The storage box obtains first data.
  • the wireless audio device component can enter the accessory working mode, and the accessory can be charged for a short time to ensure that the accessory can work normally Wait.
  • S702 Determine whether the user operation is correct according to the first data. If the user's operation is correct, S703 may be continued, and if the user's operation is incorrect, an operation prompt is sent to the wireless audio device.
  • S703 The storage box acquires second data.
  • S704 Perform analysis and diagnosis on the second data to obtain the measurement result of the current health measurement.
  • the storage box may send the measurement result to the wireless audio device (eg, earphones worn by the user), so that the user can hear the broadcast of the measurement result through the wireless audio device.
  • the wireless audio device eg, earphones worn by the user
  • auxiliary sensors can be used to detect the effectiveness of measuring posture and position
  • voice prompts can be used to help users use correct operation methods to perform health measurement
  • the measurement results can be broadcast by voice, which can lower the threshold for use and improve the measurement. efficiency.
  • the above embodiments are all described by taking the communication module 130 in the storage box 100 as an example of a Bluetooth module. It should be understood that the communication module 130 in the storage box 100 may also be an ultrasonic carrier module. The following continues the introduction by taking the communication module as an ultrasonic carrier module as an example.
  • the communication module 130 may specifically include a digital-to-analog converter 131 , a voltage-controlled oscillator 132 , and an ultrasonic generator 133 .
  • the digital-to-analog converter is used to convert the digital signal in the central processing unit into an analog signal
  • the voltage-controlled oscillator is used to modulate the analog signal to the ultrasonic range
  • the ultrasonic sounder is used to transmit the modulated signal to the outside.
  • the range of sound that the human ear can hear is about 20Hz-20KHz, and the hearing of the human ear will produce frequency loss as the age increases (most adults have a larger hearing around 20KHz). loss, the sound of that frequency cannot be heard). Therefore, the sound with a frequency greater than 17KHz can usually be called ultrasonic.
  • any device containing a microphone can receive the signal sent by the ultrasonic carrier module.
  • the ultrasonic carrier module modulates the signal through ultrasonic waves and transmits it to the outside, so as to realize simplex communication.
  • both earphones contain microphones, so the two earphones can receive the signal sent by the ultrasonic generator in the ultrasonic carrier module.
  • the ultrasonic carrier module may first transmit the frame header of the ultrasonic carrier type, so that the external receiving device enters the corresponding mode, and then transmits the data.
  • the ultrasonic carrier module may first transmit the frame header of the ultrasonic carrier type, so that the external receiving device enters the corresponding mode, and then transmits the data.
  • signals of different types of frame headers reference may be made to the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 41B .
  • class A may transmit analog audio signals
  • class B may transmit control signals
  • class C may transmit search signals.
  • these three examples are only one example, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the receiving device for example, a wireless audio device
  • the category identification module can identify the frame header through the category identification module, and then trigger a corresponding data demodulation process.
  • FIG. 41C an interaction flow chart of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application is shown in FIG. 41C .
  • the method may include the following steps:
  • the two wireless audio devices may be denoted as “first wireless audio device” and “second wireless audio device” below.
  • the data sent by the ultrasonic carrier module of the storage box to the wireless audio device may include various data, such as data related to the function of the storage box (eg, power information of the storage box), detection data of accessories, and the like. The following description will be given by taking the ultrasonic carrier module of the storage box sending the detection data of the accessory to the wireless audio device as an example.
  • the ultrasonic carrier module of the storage box sends the detection data of the accessory to the first wireless audio device and the second wireless audio device.
  • the signal sent by the ultrasonic carrier module is an analog signal.
  • the ultrasonic carrier module of the storage box can be used before sending the detection data of the accessories.
  • the indication information is sent first to indicate the type of data to be sent.
  • the first wireless audio device and the second wireless audio device may identify the received indication information. Then, the second wireless audio device may send the received indication information to the first wireless audio device.
  • the first wireless audio device may perform phase matching between the indication information received by itself and the indication information sent by the second wireless audio device to obtain the first ultrasonic phase offset between the first audio device and the second audio device. .
  • the time of the frame header of the ultrasonic carrier received by the first wireless audio device and the second wireless audio device is different.
  • the second wireless audio device receives the frame header of the ultrasonic carrier at time t, and the first ultrasonic phase offset between the two wireless audio devices is ⁇ T, then the first wireless audio device has received t+ ⁇ T duration.
  • the time difference can be used to combine the data of the two channels to achieve an equivalent doubling of the sampling rate, that is, to increase the sampling rate.
  • the first wireless audio device performs phase matching between the first detection data received by itself and the second detection data sent by the second wireless audio device to obtain an ultrasonic phase offset between the first audio device and the second audio device.
  • the ultrasonic carrier module in the storage box can send the same data to the two wireless audio devices, but due to hardware differences between the two wireless audio devices (for example, differences caused in the production process), the The data received by the two wireless audio devices is different.
  • the data corresponding to the indication information is the first data
  • the first data includes the first detection data and the second detection data
  • the data received by the first wireless audio device may be the first detection data or the second detection data.
  • the data received by the second wireless audio device may be the second detection data or the first detection data.
  • the second wireless audio device may send the received second detection data to the first wireless audio device, and then the first wireless audio device may send the received second detection data to the first wireless audio device based on the first detection data received by itself and the data sent by the second wireless audio device.
  • the second detection data obtains the phase offset between the two wireless audio devices, which may be recorded as the second ultrasonic phase offset, for example.
  • the ultrasonic phase offset between the two wireless audio devices can be calculated.
  • the first ultrasonic phase offset and the second ultrasonic phase offset in this application may be the same or may be different, which is not limited in this application.
  • the first wireless audio device fuses the first detection data sent by the second audio device and the second detection data received by itself according to the ultrasonic phase offset to obtain fused data.
  • the first wireless audio device demodulates the merged data.
  • the storage box is connected to an accessory with auscultation function
  • the processor of the storage box can first control the ultrasonic carrier module to send the frame header of the ultrasonic carrier type, and then transmit the auscultation through ultrasonic carrier communication.
  • the sound signal is sent out.
  • the receiving end device enters the signal demodulation processing step, converts the analog signal into a digital signal, and finally converts the digital signal into a sound signal, so that the user can perform auscultation wirelessly.
  • the signal sent by the ultrasonic carrier module is an analog signal.
  • the range of human heart sounds is usually 0-200 Hz
  • the single-channel microphone method can cover its frequency band range.
  • the range of human lung sounds is 50Hz-1200Hz
  • the high-frequency part mainly corresponds to the abnormal lung sounds in the state of lung disease
  • the single-channel microphone sampling cannot cover the high-frequency part.
  • two-channel data alignment can be performed through the frame header to realize data fusion of the two channels, thereby increasing the sampling rate.
  • FIG. 41D it is a schematic diagram of data alignment according to an embodiment of the present application. It can be seen from FIG. 41D that, based on the time of the main earphone, the data of the sub-earphone and the data of the main earphone differ in phase by ⁇ T.
  • the data of the main earphone and the sub-earphone can be fused, that is, the data of the two channels can be fused into data with a double sampling rate of 88.2KHz.
  • FIG. 41E it is a schematic diagram of performing data fusion according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 41F it is a schematic diagram of a data demodulation processing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the data demodulation process in this embodiment of the present application may include four processes: filtering with a band-pass filter, undersampling, zero-crossing detection, and filtering with a low-pass filter.
  • the passband of the band-pass filter can be set to be the same width as the transmission frequency band of the storage box, which has an anti-aliasing effect in the frequency domain.
  • the signal is then undersampled with a frequency less than Fs/2.
  • Fs/2 is twice the sampling rate of the microphone on the headset, that is, Fs corresponds to a single sampling rate of the microphone, usually 44.1KHz.
  • Under-sampling makes the signal move symmetrically in the frequency domain, and the original relatively high-frequency signal components are moved to the relatively low-frequency position.
  • the low-frequency signal can be detected by zero-crossing in a terminal such as an earphone, that is, whether the connection line formed by two adjacent sampling points crosses the zero level.
  • the original signal is filtered by a low-pass filter to obtain a demodulated signal.
  • under-sampling means resampling the already sampled digital signal.
  • the frequency of undersampling is half of the original sampling rate, which is usually 22.05KHz in the prior art (because the original sampling rate of a single channel in the prior art is 44.1KHz); in the embodiment of the present application, since the equivalent sampling rate is 88.2KHz, So the undersampling rate is 44.1KHz.
  • the method for fusion of multi-channel microphones may also be used to improve the bandwidth of ultrasonic audio.
  • the frequency band of the modulated ultrasonic wave is 18KHz-20KHz.
  • the demodulation of ultrasonic signals in the frequency band of 22KHz-42KHz can be realized at most, which is 10 times larger than the bandwidth of 18KHz-20KHz in a single channel, and the corresponding resolution of the original signal in the time domain corresponds to increased by a factor of 10.
  • 22KHz-42KHz can reduce the impact on children's hearing.
  • the detection time interval Tx corresponds to the maximum bandwidth that can be demodulated to the signal.
  • the frequency band after under-sampling is 2KHz-4KHz, and it is not easy to expand this bandwidth, otherwise the corresponding ultrasonic bandwidth exceeds 18KHz-20KHz.
  • the zero-crossing detection interval Tx is 2ms, the highest frequency of the corresponding signal is 250Hz, that is, for the signal with the lowest frequency of 2KHz, 4 ⁇ 1 zero-crossing points can be detected. If Tx is further reduced, the count of ⁇ 1 The influence of the error will become larger, which is not conducive to signal recovery.
  • the ultrasonic transmission signal can be selected to be far away from Fs/2, so that the highest frequency of the signal at the receiving end is far away from 0 after undersampling. 14KHz, the highest frequency is 20KHz, then the zero-crossing detection interval can be as small as 0.4ms, and the highest frequency corresponding to the restored signal is 2500Hz. This embodiment realizes the original signal transmission with higher bandwidth.
  • the zero-crossing point detection interval is usually 20ms. At this time, 80 points will be detected at 2KHz, and 160 points will be detected at 4KHz. There are 81 possible values in the middle, and there are 81 amplitude resolutions corresponding to the sender.
  • the sampling interval of the zero-crossing point will limit the bandwidth of the signal that can be demodulated and recovered. For example, if the zero-crossing point detection rate is set to 2ms, a value corresponding to 2ms is output, and the maximum frequency of the signal is 250Hz; If the sampling interval is the zero-crossing point, the result of one point is output in 20ms, and the maximum frequency of the corresponding signal is 25Hz.
  • the transmitting end sends ultrasonic waves of 24KHz-30KHz
  • the equivalent sampling rate is 88.2KHz through dual-channel fusion
  • the undersampling rate is 44.1KHz, so that the spectrum is mirrored at 22.05KHz and moved to 14KHz -20KHz.
  • the zero-crossing detection interval can be appropriately shortened.
  • the detection interval is set to 0.4ms. At this time, about 5 zero-crossing points can be detected for the low frequency 14KHz.
  • the maximum bandwidth of the original signal of the transmitting end supported by the ultrasonic carrier communication can be increased.
  • the amplitude resolution of the original signal at the transmitting end can be increased.
  • the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application are introduced from the perspective of a device as an execution subject.
  • the device may include a hardware structure and/or software modules, and implement the above functions in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module.
  • a certain function among the above-mentioned functions is performed in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module, depending on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution.
  • the communication apparatus 4200 includes: one or more processors 4201; one or more memories 4202;
  • one or more computer programs are stored in the memory 4202, and the one or more computer programs include instructions; the processor 4201 invokes the instructions stored in the memory 4202, so that the communication device 4200 can use the communication method of the above embodiment.
  • the communication interface 4203 is used to communicate with other devices through a transmission medium.
  • the processor 4201 can use the communication interface 4203 to send and receive data.
  • the communication interface may be an accessory interface or an audio device interface or the like.
  • the processor 4201 may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component, which can realize Alternatively, each method, step, and logic block diagram disclosed in the embodiments of the present application are executed.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software module may be located in the memory 4202, and the processor 4201 reads the program instructions in the memory 4202, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory 4202 may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., or a volatile memory (volatile memory), For example RAM.
  • the memory may also be, but is not limited to, any other medium that can be used to carry or store the desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer.
  • the memory in this embodiment of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of implementing a storage function, for storing instructions and/or data.
  • the present application also provides a computer storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer causes the computer to execute the communication method provided by the above embodiment.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, including instructions, which, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to execute the communication method provided by the above embodiments.
  • These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory capable of directing a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to function in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory result in an article of manufacture comprising instruction means, the instructions
  • the apparatus implements the functions specified in the flow or flow of the flowcharts and/or the block or blocks of the block diagrams.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Acoustics & Sound (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Telephone Set Structure (AREA)

Abstract

一种无线音频设备组件、通信方法及装置,其中,无线音频设备组件可包括无线音频设备、收纳盒以及配件。该方法可包括:无线音频设备组件接收到用户对所述收纳盒上的配对按钮的第一操作,所述第一操作用于触发所述配件进入配件工作模式;所述无线音频设备组件响应所述第一操作,控制配件进入配件工作模式;所述无线音频设备组件的所述无线音频设备接收所述配件在所述配件工作模式下的检测数据。通过在收纳盒上连接配件,能够对收纳盒上进行功能扩展,同时提升用户体验。

Description

一种无线音频设备组件、通信方法及装置
相关申请的交叉引用
本申请要求在2021年02月22日提交中国专利局、申请号为202110198105.2、申请名称为“一种无线音频设备组件”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中;本申请要求在2021年03月31日提交中国专利局、申请号为202110351496.7、申请名称为“一种无线音频设备组件、通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及终端技术领域,尤其涉及一种无线音频设备组件、通信方法及装置。
背景技术
近年来,无线音频设备,例如真无线立体声(true wireless stereo,TWS)耳机由于其携带轻便、配对轻松等优点逐渐被用户所选择。而为了对无线音频设备进行补充,并且防止无线音频设备的丢失,用户不得不随身携带无线音频设备的收纳盒。
由于收纳盒的体积较大,适合进行功能扩展,因此,目前为了实现收纳盒功能的扩展,通常是在收纳盒上集成传感器。交互按钮等部件的方法,这种方法虽然可以实现与收纳盒上所集成的硬件相对应的功能,但是这种方式会增加收纳盒的成本,并且灵活性较差,例如对于不需要某些功能的用户而言用户体验较差。因此,如何在收纳盒上进行功能扩展的同时,提升用户使用体验是有待解决的问题。
发明内容
本申请提供一种无线音频设备组件、通信方法及装置,用以在收纳盒上进行功能扩展,并提升用户使用体验。
第一方面,本申请提供了一种无线音频设备组件,该无线音频设备组件可以包括收纳盒、无线音频设备和配件。其中,收纳盒包括本体和盒盖,盒盖可盖合于本体,以用于实现收纳盒的收纳功能。具体实施时,在本体上可以设置有第一槽位和第二槽位,第一槽位可设置于收纳盒的第一表面,且可容置于盒盖与本体盖合形成的容置空间内。无线音频设备可插设于收纳盒的本体的第一槽位内,这样即可实现收纳盒对无线音频设备的收纳作用。另外,无线音频设备还可以与收纳盒通信连接,从而实现无线音频设备与收纳盒之间的信息交互。配件可集成有不同于无线音频设备和收纳盒的功能模块,并可实现与收纳盒之间的通信连接。在将配件装配于收纳盒时,配件可拆卸的插接于所述第二槽位,并与本体卡接固定。另外,配件的至少部分可暴露于收纳盒的外部。
采用本申请提供的无线音频设备组件,由于配件和无线音频设备都与收纳盒通信连接。这样,配件可将传感数据、交互控制信息、配件ID等信息等传递至收纳盒。收纳盒对数据进行处理后,将接收到的信息传输至与其配对的无线音频设备,或通过通信模块传递至外部终端设备。同时,无线音频设备和外部终端设备的数据信息也可通过收纳盒进行处理后,发送到配件进行处理。由此可见,在本申请中,收纳盒的功能得到有效的扩展,其可提升用户使用体验。
在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,配件可以包括相连接的检测部和安装部。在检测部中可设置有传感器等用于实现配件功能的模块。安装部用于配件与收纳盒的安装,其中,安装部包括连接部和接触部,接触部通过连接部与检测部连接,且接触部可拆卸的插接于第二槽位,以实现配件与收纳盒的可拆卸连接。这样,用户可以根据自身的需要选择是否携带配件,以及对配件进行更换,从而可提升用户的使用体验。
由于第一槽位和第二槽位分别是用来对无线音频设备和配件进行收纳和安装的,为了避免在将在无线音频设备和配件设置于收纳盒时,造成相互干涉。本申请一个可能的实现方式中,可以将第一槽位和第二槽位分别设置于本体的不同表面。配件的安装部可位于检测部的朝向本体的一侧表面,从而便于配件与收纳盒的安装。
为了实现配件与收纳盒的本体的卡接固定,在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,收纳盒还可以包括传动机构。该传动机构位于收纳盒的壳体内,所述传动机构包括连接臂、驱动部件和卡接部件。其中,连接臂的一端与盒盖固定连接,驱动部件位于连接臂与卡接部件之间,卡接部件位于驱动部件的背离第一表面的一侧,且可与驱动部件的端部相抵接。由于连接边的一端与盒盖固定连接,这样,连接臂可随盒盖转动,且连接臂与盒盖的转动方向相同。另外,在连接臂转动的过程中还可带动驱动部件转动,驱动部件的转动方向与连接臂的转动方向相反。驱动部件在转动的过程中,还可推动卡接部件向背离第一表面的方向滑动,从而实现触动机构的传动连接。在该实现方式中,安装部在插接于第二槽位时,可与卡接部件相卡接,从而实现配件与收纳盒之间的卡接固定。
具体设置传动机构时,可使连接臂的另一端设置有第一抵接部。在驱动部件的靠近连接臂的一端设置有第二抵接部,靠近卡接部件的一端设置有凸起。其中,第二抵接部相对于第一抵接部靠近第一表面设置,凸起朝向背离第一表面的一侧凸出于驱动部件的表面,且卡接部件与凸起相抵接。这样,在连接臂的第一抵接部朝向第一表面运动的过程中可与第二抵接部相抵接,从而推动驱动部件转动,以使驱动部件的凸起能够沿背离第一表面的方向运动,并推动卡接部件向背离第一表面的方向滑动。
为提高卡接部件滑动的平稳性,还可以在壳体的内部设置滑槽。在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,第二槽位可以包括开设于壳体的开口,滑槽可以靠近壳体的开口设置,并使开口与滑槽连通。卡接部件可在滑槽内沿朝向或者背离第一表面的方向滑动,这样,滑槽为卡接部件的运动提供了导向的作用,其有利于提高滑槽滑动的稳定性。
卡接部件沿滑槽向朝向第一表面方向的滑动,可通过弹性件来实现。在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,该弹性件可以设置于滑槽内,并位于卡接部件的背离第一表面的一侧,且与卡接部件弹性抵接。这样,在驱动部件推动卡接部件向背离第一表面的一侧滑动时,弹性件积蓄弹性力。当驱动部件对于卡接部件的推动力小于弹性件积蓄的弹性力时,弹性件推动卡接部件沿朝向第一表面的一侧的方向滑动。由于驱动部件的凸起与卡接部件相抵接,因此,在卡接部件朝向第一表面滑动的过程中,会推动驱动部件设置有凸起的一端向朝向第一表面运动。
卡接部件与配件的安装部件的卡接方式有很多,在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,卡接部件可以开设有卡孔。该卡孔为贯穿孔,卡孔包括相连通的第一孔位和第二孔位,第一孔位相对于第二孔位靠近驱动部件设置。另外,安装部可穿过第一孔位,并可卡接于第二孔位。
在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,收纳盒还可以设置有插接底座,该插接底座与卡接 部件设置于驱动部件的同一侧。插接底座具有插接槽,且插接槽的槽口朝向卡接部件开设。在本申请中,第二槽位可由开设于收纳盒本体的壳体的开口、卡接部件的卡孔以及插接槽构成。这样,安装部的接触部可依次穿过开口、卡孔插设于插接槽内,并通过与卡孔的第二孔位的卡接实现安装部与本体的固定。
在插接槽内还可以设置有多个触点,接触部的背离检测部的表面设置有多个接触区,每个接触区可与一个触点对应接触并通信连接。从而实现配件与收纳盒的通信连接。
在本申请一个可能的实施例中,盒盖可以具有第一转动位和第二转动位,在第二转动位时盒盖打开的角度,大于在第一转动位时盒盖打开的角度。另外,盒盖处于第一转动位时,卡接部件的第二孔位与开口相对;当盒盖处于第二转动位时,卡接部件的第一孔位与开口相对。
当配件插接于收纳盒,且盒盖处于第一转动位时,卡接部件的第二孔位与开口相对,接触部与检测部位于卡接部件的两侧,并且接触部在卡接部件上的投影的至少部分位于孔位的轮廓范围之外。这样,接触部无法沿自第二孔位向开口的方向移动,故实现安装部与卡接部件的卡接固定。另外,当盒盖处于第二转动位时,插接于收纳盒的配件的接触部可穿过第一孔位和开口从第二槽位抽出;或,配件的接触部可穿过开口和第一孔位插设于插接槽,以实现配件与收纳盒的拆卸或者安装。在本申请中,通过对盒盖的打开角度的设计可实现卡接部件的第一孔位和第二孔位与开口的相对位置的控制,进而实现安装部的安装以及拆卸,其可有效的提高安装部与收纳盒的装配效率,提升用户使用体验。
传动机构除了可采用上述结构外,在本申请一些可能的实现方式中,传动机构在具体设置时,可以包括行程开关和剪刀脚结构。其中,行程开关由开设于壳体的通孔露出,以便于用于的操作。剪刀脚结构可以包括第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚,第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚相铰接,行程开关自通孔向壳体内运动可增大第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚之间的夹角。这样,安装部插接于第二槽位时,可插设于第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚之间,并通过与第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚相卡接来实现配件的安装部与收纳盒的固定,或者通过增大第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚之间的夹角,以使安装部能够从剪刀脚结构中抽出,从而实现配件与收纳盒的拆卸。
在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,在具体设置行程开关时,行程开关包括按压部、传动部和挤压部。壳体内部可以设置有开关盒,该开关盒罩设于通孔。其中,按压部的至少部分可容置于开关盒,且按压部的至少部分可伸入通孔,这样按压部可在通孔和开关盒的腔体内运动,其有利于提高按压部运动的稳定性。传动部自按压部向壳体的内部延伸,挤压部设置于按压部的背离安装部的一端,且挤压部可对第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚施加挤压力,以使第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚之间的夹角增大。
在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,第二槽位包括开设于壳体的开口,通孔可与开口相对设置。另外,收纳盒还设置有插接底座,插接底座具有插接槽,且插接槽的槽口朝向开口。
在具体设置剪刀脚结构时,第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚的部分穿入插接槽内,另一部分由插接底座的靠近行程开关的槽壁伸出至插接底座的外部,挤压部可容置于第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚的伸出至插接底座的外部的部分界定的区间内。这样,挤压部在两个卡接脚界定的区间内运动,即可实现对第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚的挤压,其可使第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚之间的夹角增大。
为了实现安装部的接触部与第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚的卡接,在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,可使第一卡接脚的穿入插接槽的部分的端部具有第一卡钩,第二卡接脚的穿入插接槽的部分的端部具有第二卡钩,第一卡勾和第二卡勾均向第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚界定的区域内弯折,这样,接触部可插设于第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚界定的区域内,并与第一卡勾和第二卡勾卡接,以实现配件与收纳盒的固定连接。
另外,在第一卡接脚的穿入插接底座的部分和第二卡接脚的穿入插接底座的部分之间通过弹性件连接,弹性件处于拉伸状态。这样可在行程开关被释放时,使第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚能够在弹性件的弹性拉力作用下复位。第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚的复位可对行程开关的挤压部施加一个朝向通孔方向的力,从而推动行程开关伸入至通孔内,以便于用户的后续使用。
在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,在插接底座的朝向行程开关的表面还可以设置有限位部。这样,当行程开关朝向剪刀脚结构运动至设定行程距离时,挤压部与限位部相抵接,从而可避免行程开关与插接底座之间的撞击,以延长其使用寿命。
另外,连接部上还可以套设有密封圈,这样在将连接部插设于第二槽位时,密封圈可与第二槽位的开口过盈配合,从而实现对连接部与壳体之间的密封,其可避免液体灰尘等杂质进入壳体内对配件或者收纳盒造成损坏,以有利于延长无线音频设备组件的使用寿命。
第二槽位除了可与第一槽位设置于本体的不同表面外,在一些可能的实现方式中,还可以使第一槽位与第二槽位设置于本体的同一表面。另外,还可以使第二槽位能够容置于盒盖与本体盖合形成的容置空间内,从而提高收纳盒的外观一体性以及美观性。
在第一槽位与第二槽位设置于本体的同一表面的场景下,为了使配件能够插设于第二槽位,在对配件的结构进行设置时,可使连接部与检测部的一个端部连接,接触部自连接部向收纳盒一侧弯折。另外,在第二槽位的至少一个槽壁上设置有第一限位结构,接触部设置有第二限位部,这样,通过第一限位部可与第二限位部一一对应的限位卡接即可实现接触部与本体的卡接固定,进而实现配件与收纳盒的固定连接。
为了提高配件与收纳盒之间连接的可靠性,在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,还可以在检测部设置有第一磁铁,该第一磁铁设置于检测部的背离接触部的一端,其可理解为第一磁铁和连接部位于检测部的相对的两个端部。另外,在收纳盒上还设置有第二磁铁,该第二磁铁示例性的可以设置于收纳盒的壳体的内侧表面上。则配件与收纳盒之间还可以通过第一磁铁与第二磁铁的相互吸附进行固定。
在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,第二槽位内设置有多个触点,接触部设置有多个接触区,每个接触区与一个触点接触并通信连接。其中,触点可通过排线连接至收纳盒主电路板的线缆连接座。在本申请中,不对触点的数量进行限定,每个触点可与电源线或者通信线连接,以用于实现供电以及通信的功能。接触区可为配件的接触电路板裸露的焊盘形成,该接触电路板可设置于连接部。另外,在接触电路板上还可以留有线缆插座,导线的一端与线缆插座连接,另一端通过电路板插座连接到配件主电路板上。配件主电路板可设置于配件的检测部的外壳中,检测部可通过扣设于外壳的后壳进行密封,后壳可采用软质橡胶或硅胶材质。这样,在配件与收纳盒组装后,后壳可与收纳盒接触,从而可以减小二者接触时的摩擦,进而减少对收纳盒的磨损。
通常情况下,配件可随收纳盒一起随身携带,为了提高其携带便利性,就要求配件的体积较小。在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,配件中未单独设置电池,配件的功能实现所 需要的电量由收纳盒提供。具体实施时,收纳盒中设置有中央处理器、电池、第一开关管,中央处理器可以通过第一开关管控制电池与配件的导通状态。在一些可能的实现方式中,收纳盒中还可以设置有二极管,该二极管用于保护开关管和电池,防止配件的电流反向灌入。
配件设置有超级电容、二极管和功能电路,在将收纳盒与配件连接后,充电电流从收纳盒的电池流入配件,配件端可采用超级电容进行电量存储。超级电容存储的电量可通过二极管为功能电路供电。
在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,收纳盒中还可以包括第一模拟开关,其中,中央处理器可控制第一模拟开关与电池导通,并将第一模拟开关与电池形成的连接线路作为电源线为配件充电。由于配件类型与充电时间相关,可将不同配件所需的充电电量与时间的对应关系表存储在收纳盒中,从而可根据配件的类型对其充电时间进行计时,并在收纳盒为配件充电设定时间后,通过中央处理器断开第一模拟开关与电池之间的连接。这样可针对配件的单次使用对其进行充电,其可避免不必要的耗电。另外,在第一模拟开关与电池之间的连接断开后,第一模拟开关可切换至与中央处理器的数字管脚导通的状态,以用于进行数据传输。
在配件端还可以设置有第二模拟开关,第二模拟开关可用于与超级电容导通,并进行电量存储。另外,超级电容的正极可连接比较器,当比较器判断超级电容的电压超过设定值时,比较器控制第二模拟开关切换至与配件的数字管脚导通的状态,以进行数据发送和接收。在该电路系统中,收纳盒对配件进行充电的电路系统,可以使配件和收纳盒之间的电源正极线和数据通信线通过模拟开关进行复用,从而可降低二者之间连接接口的复杂度,从而可提高系统的可靠性。
在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,收纳盒还可以设置有配件触发开关,触发开关开启时,收纳盒对配件进行供电,以在较短的时间内实现收纳盒对配件的供电,随后可实现二者之间的通信;当触发开关关闭时,收纳盒停止对配件的供电,从而可实现零电量损耗,降低功耗。
在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,收纳盒中还可以设置有通信模块,收纳盒的中央处理器可控制通信模块与无线音频设备、配件以及外部终端设备进行通信。
通信模块的具体设置方式有很多种,在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,通信模块可以包括蓝牙模块和天线。在另外一个可能的实现方式中,通信模块还可以包括数模转换模块、亚控振荡器和超声波发生器。其中,数模转换器,可用于将中央处理器中的数字信号转换为模拟信号,压控振荡器用于将模拟信号调制到超声波范围;超声波发生器可用于将该调制信号向外发射。
由于无线音频设备组件在使用时,通常会随身携带,这就很难避免无线音频设备组件,尤其是收纳盒与其它的物件之间发生摩擦或者碰撞。针对此,在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,无线音频设备组件还可以具有保护壳。该保护壳在具体设置时,其可以包括第一套体和第二套体,其中,第一套体可套设于收纳盒的本体,第二套体可套设于收纳盒的盒盖,从而实现对收纳盒的保护。
在本申请一个可能的实现方式中,第一套体还可以设置有功能模块和连接接口。其中,功能模块可通过连接接口与收纳盒通信连接。另外,当第一套体和收纳盒的本体均设置有线圈时,还可以使第一套体通过其内部的线圈实现与收纳盒的本体的双向充电和通信。
连接接口与收纳盒的连接方式,可以参照配件与收纳盒之间的连接,示例性的,连接接口可以插设于第二槽位。这样,可使保护壳对收纳盒起到保护作用的基础上,还可以作为配件进行使用。
第二方面,本申请提供一种通信方法,该方法应用于无线音频设备组件,所述无线音频设备组件包括收纳盒、无线音频设备以及配件,所述配件可拆卸的连接于所述收纳盒,所述配件包括用于健康监测的传感器,该方法可包括:所述收纳盒接收到用户对所述收纳盒上的配对按钮的第一操作;所述收纳盒响应所述第一操作,控制所述配件进入配件工作模式;所述收纳盒接收所述配件在所述配件工作模式下的检测数据。
通过上述技术方案,可以在收纳盒上连接配件,实现对收纳盒的功能扩展,并且可以在配件检测完数据之后,将配件的检测数据发送给收纳盒,从而使得收纳盒可以将配件的检测数据发送给外部终端设备或者无线音频设备,能够提升用户体验。
在一种可能的设计中,所述收纳盒接收到用户对所述收纳盒上的配对按钮的第一操作之前,所述方法还包括:所述收纳盒与所述配件通过微动开关进行连接。
通过上述技术方案,收纳盒可以通过硬件上新增的微动开关来实现与配件的连接。这里的连接可包括通信连接(配对连接)和物理连接。
在一种可能的设计中,所述无线音频设备包括第一无线音频设备和第二无线音频设备;所述方法还包括:所述收纳盒将所述检测数据发送给所述第一无线音频设备;所述第一无线音频设备将所述检测数据发送给所述第二无线音频设备。
通过上述技术方案,当一个无线音频设备在收纳盒外,另一个无线音频设备在收纳盒内时,可以实现收纳盒通过盒内的无线音频设备将配件的检测数据传输给盒外的无线音频设备。同时当两个无线音频设备均在盒外时,可以通过收纳盒上的蓝牙模块将配件的检测数据发送给一个无线音频设备,然后再转发给另外一个无线音频设备。
在一种可能的设计中,当所述第一无线音频设备和所述第二无线音频设备位于所述收纳盒外时,所述方法还包括:所述第二无线音频设备将所述检测数据发送给第一电子设备。
通过上述技术方案,在两个无线音频设备均在收纳盒盒外时,可以实现将配件的检测数据通过无线音频设备发送给外部终端设备。
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:所述收纳盒将所述检测数据发送给第一电子设备,所述第一电子设备为与所述收纳盒通过第一通信方式进行通信连接的电子设备。
通过上述技术方案,当收纳盒中有蓝牙模块时,收纳盒可以直接将配件的检测数据发送给外部终端设备。
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:所述无线音频设备接收所述第一电子设备发送的检测数据。
通过上述技术方案,收纳盒可以通过蓝牙模块直接将配件的检测数据发送给外部终端设备,然后外部终端设备再将配件的检测数据发送给无线音频设备。
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一电子设备通过第二通信方式与第二电子设备进行通信连接;所述方法还包括:所述收纳盒接收用户的第二操作,所述第二操作为对所述收纳盒上的控制按键的触发操作;所述收纳盒根据所述第二操作生成与所述第二操作相对应的控制指令;所述收纳盒将所述控制指令发送给所述第一电子设备,以使所述第一电子设备将所述控制指令发送给所述第二电子设备。
通过上述技术方案,可以实现通过收纳盒或者配件来控制智能家居的场景,不需要用 户在手机的应用程序上进行操作,能够提升用户体验。
在一种可能的设计中,所述收纳盒接收所述配件在所述配件工作模式下的检测数据之前,所述方法还包括:所述收纳盒接收所述配件发送的辅助传感数据;所述收纳盒若根据所述辅助传感数据与预先存储的传感数据判断用户操作不正确,则向所述无线音频设备发送语音提示信息。
通过上述技术方案,收纳盒可以对用户的操作进行提示,使得用户调整到正确的姿势来操作,能够使得检测到的数据更准确。
在一种可能的设计中,所述无线音频设备包括第一无线音频设备和第二无线音频设备;当所述收纳盒上包括超声载波通信模块时,所述方法还包括:所述第一无线音频设备接收所述收纳盒上的超声载波通信模块发送的配件的第一检测数据;所述第一无线音频设备根据所述第一检测数据和第二检测数据确定所述第一无线音频设备和所述第二无线音频设备之间的超声相位偏移;其中,所述第二检测数据为所述第二无线音频设备接收到所述收纳盒上的超声载波通信模块发送的配件的检测数据,所述第一检测数据和所述第二检测数据不同;所述第一无线音频设备根据所述超声相位偏移将所述第一检测数据与所述第二检测数据进行融合,得到融合之后的数据。
通过上述技术方案,可以实现将两个无线音频设备的数据进行融合,使得解调之后的数据的频带更宽,使得无线音频设备可以接收到更高频带的信号。
第三方面,本申请提供一种装置,该装置可包括收纳盒、无线音频设备和配件。其中,收纳盒、无线音频设备所执行功能具体可参阅第二方面各个可能的实现方式,此处不再重复赘述。
附图说明
图1为本申请一实施例提供的无线音频设备组件的结构示意图;
图2为本申请另一实施例提供的无线音频设备组件的结构示意图;
图3为本申请一实施例提供的收纳盒对配件进行充电的电路系统框图;
图4为本申请一实施例提供的收纳盒的电路系统框图;
图5为本申请一实施例提供的收纳盒对配件进行充电的电路系统图;
图6为本申请另一实施例提供的无线音频设备组件的结构示意图;
图7为本申请另一实施例提供的无线音频设备组件的结构示意图;
图8为本申请另一实施例提供的无线音频设备组件的结构示意图;
图9为本申请一实施例提供的无线音频设备组件各组成部分的爆炸图;
图10为本申请一实施例提供的用于实现配件与收纳盒可拆卸连接的主要结构;
图11为本申请一实施例提供的配件的结构示意图;
图12为本申请一实施例提供的配件与收纳盒组装状态下的剖面图;
图13为本申请一实施例提供的收纳盒打开至第一转动位时的状态图;
图14为本申请一实施例提供的收纳盒打开至第二转动位时的状态图;
图15为本申请一实施例提供的将配件从收纳盒的本体上进行拆卸的过程图;
图16为本申请一实施例提供的配件与收纳盒完成拆卸时的状态图;
图17为本申请另一实施例提供的无线音频设备组件的结构示意图;
图18为本申请另一实施例提供的配件与收纳盒组装状态下的剖面图;
图19为本申请另一实施例提供的将配件从收纳盒的本体上进行拆卸的过程图;
图20为本申请另一实施例提供的配件与收纳盒完成拆卸时的状态图;
图21为本申请另一实施例提供的无线音频设备组件的结构示意图;
图22为本申请一实施例提供的配件与收纳盒处于拆卸状态的结构示意图;
图23为图22中A处的局部结构放大图;
图24为本申请一实施例提供的收纳盒的内部结构示意图;
图25为本申请一实施例提供的配件的内部结构示意图;
图26为本申请一实施例提供的配件的接触电路的结构示意图;
图27为本申请一实施例提供的无线音频设备组件的剖面图;
图28为本申请另一实施例提供的收纳盒对配件进行充电的电路系统;
图29为本申请另一实施例提供的收纳盒的电路系统框图;
图30为本申请一实施例提供的人耳听力损失与年龄的关系曲线图;
图31为本申请另一实施例提供的无线音频设备组件的结构示意图;
图32为本申请另一实施例提供的无线音频设备组件的结构示意图;
图33为图32中B处的局部结构放大图;
图34为本申请实施例提供的一种收纳盒的硬件结构示意图;
图35为本申请实施例提供的一种应用场景示意图;
图36为本申请实施例提供的一种工作模式之间的转换示意图;
图37A为本申请实施例提供的一种配件与收纳盒进行配对的用户界面示意图;
图37B为本申请实施例提供的一种配件与收纳盒进行配对的方法流程图;
图38A为本申请实施例提供的一种无线音频设备与终端设备通信的示意图;
图38B为本申请实施例提供的一种配件检测数据的传输方法示意图;
图38C为本申请实施例提供的一种配件检测数据的传输方法流程图;
图38D为本申请实施例提供的一种数据的传输方法示意图;
图39A为本申请实施例提供的一种数据的传输方法示意图;
图39B为本申请实施例提供的一种数据的传输方法示意图;
图40A为本申请实施例提供的一种应用场景示意图;
图40B为本申请实施例提供的一种连接有配件的收纳盒的示意图;
图40C为用户通过收纳盒进行听诊的示意图;
图40D为本申请实施例提供的一种利用配件进行健康测量的流程示意图;
图40E为本申请实施例提供的一种健康测量的方法流程图;
图41A为本申请实施例提供的另一种收纳盒的结构示意图;
图41B为本申请实施例提供的一种不同类别的帧头的信号示意图;
图41C为本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输方法交互流程图;
图41D为本申请实施例提供的一种进行数据对齐的示意图;
图41E为本申请实施例提供的一种进行数据融合的示意图;
图41F为本申请实施例提供的一种数据解调处理方法示意图;
图41G为本申请实施例提供的一种过零点检测的示意图;
图41H为本申请实施例提供的一种单通道与双通道的采样频带范围示意图;
图42为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图。
附图说明:
1-收纳盒;1001-电池;1002-通信模块;10021-蓝牙模块;10022-天线;
10023-数模转换器;10024-压控振荡器;10025-超声波发生器;1003-配对模块;
1004-电源管理模块;1005-状态指示灯;1006-在位检测传感器;1007-微动开关;
1008-存储器;1009-音频设备接口;10010-CPU;10011-按钮;10012-配件接口;
10013-开关管;10014-二极管;10015-模拟开关;11-本体;1101-第一槽位;
1102-第二槽位;110201-开口;110202-第一限位结构;1103-第一表面;1104-第二表面;
1105-第一托架;11051-容纳腔;1106-第二托架;11061-卡槽;1107-收纳盒主电路板;
11071-线缆连接座;1108-接口模块;11081-接口插座;11082-接口转换电路板;
11083-排线;1109-接口电路板;11091a,11091b-电触点插座;11010-电池固定件;
11012-无线充电底座;11013-充电线圈;11014-充电线;11015-壳体;110151-滑槽;
1101511-第二限位柱;110152-弹性件;110153-第二磁铁;110154-开关盒;110155-通孔;
11016-连接臂;110161-第一抵接部;110162-第一转轴;11017-驱动部件;
110171-第二抵接部;110172-凸起;110173-第二转轴;11018-卡接部件;110181-卡孔;
110181a-第一孔位;110181b-第二孔位;110182-第一限位柱;11019-插接底座;
110191-插接槽;110192-触点;11020-排线;11021-行程开关;110211-按压部;
110212-传动部;110213-挤压部;11022-缓冲部;11023-剪刀脚结构;110231-第一卡接脚;
110232-第二卡接脚;110233-铰接轴;110234-弹性件;11024-限位部;12-盒盖;
2-无线音频设备;2001-电池;2002-麦克风;2003-扬声器;2004-通信模块;
2005-交互控制模块;2006-音频设备接口;
3-外部终端设备;3001-通信模块;
4-配件;4001-传感器;4002-模数转换模块;4003-电源模块;4004-交互控制模块;
4005-ID生成模块;4006-通信模块;4007-配件接口;4008-超级电容;4009-二极管;
40010-功能电路;400101-放大器;400102-滤波器;400103-模数转换器;400104-存储器;
400105-驱动器;400106-执行器;40011-接触电路板;40012-线缆插座;40013-导线;
40014-电路板插座;40015-配件主电路板;40016-模拟开关;40017-比较器;
41-检测部;42-安装部;4201-连接部;4202-接触部;42021-接触区;
42021-第二限位结构;43-密封圈;44-外壳;45-后壳;46-第一磁铁;
5-保护壳;51-第一套体;511-卡接槽;512-连接接口;52-第二套体。
具体实施方式
下面将结合本申请以下实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行详尽描述。
本申请实施例涉及的至少一个,包括一个或者多个;其中,多个是指大于或者等于两个。另外,需要理解的是,在本申请的描述中,“第一”、“第二”等词汇,仅用于区分描述的目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性,也不能理解为指示或暗示顺序。
以下实施例中所使用的术语只是为了描述特定实施例的目的,而并非旨在作为对本申请的限制。如在本申请的说明书和所附权利要求书中所使用的那样,单数表达形式“一种”、 “所述”、“上述”、“该”和“这一”旨在也包括例如“一个或多个”这种表达形式,除非其上下文中明确地有相反指示。还应当理解,在本申请实施例中,“一个或多个”是指一个或两个以上(包含两个);“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系;例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A、B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
在本说明书中描述的参考“一个实施例”或“一些实施例”等意味着在本申请的一个或多个实施例中包括结合该实施例描述的特定特征、结构或特点。由此,在本说明书中的不同之处出现的语句“在一个实施例中”、“在一些实施例中”、“在其他一些实施例中”、“在另外一些实施例中”等不是必然都参考相同的实施例,而是意味着“一个或多个但不是所有的实施例”,除非是以其他方式另外特别强调。术语“包括”、“包含”、“具有”及它们的变形都意味着“包括但不限于”,除非是以其他方式另外特别强调。
目前,无线音频设备逐渐发展成熟,其中以真无线立体声设备(true wireless stereo,TWS)的发展最为突出。无线音频设备例如可为耳机,其内部集成了无线天线、处理器芯片、电池、麦克风、扬声器、佩戴传感器以及操控传感器等关键部件,从而可通过自身的无线通讯功能与手机等外部设备进行音频数据的传输。由于无线音频设备具有携带轻便、可实现无线通讯等优点,再加上无线蓝牙传输技术的不断成熟,使其使用体验逐步提升,将来有望完全取代有线耳机,成为用户生活中必不可少的便携设备。
另外,为了满足轻便小巧的设计需求,无线音频设备的电池较小,其只能存储短期使用的电量。这就需要为无线音频设备提供一个能够随时为其充电的设备。目前,通常为无线音频设备2配有收纳盒1,以使收纳盒1和无线音频设备2可形成如图1所示的无线音频设备2组件进行使用。其中,参照图1,收纳盒1可起到收纳和充电等基础功能,而无线音频数据的传输是由无线音频设备2自身完成的。为了及时补充电量以及防止无线音频设备2遗失,用户通常不得不随身携带收纳盒1。而目前的收纳盒1本身的体积较大,且功能较为单一,这导致用户的使用体验较差。
基于上述问题,本申请提供了一种无线音频设备组件,以实现对无线音频设备的收纳盒进行功能扩展。另外,考虑到收纳盒是随身携带的物品,故便于对其进行移动健康、影音娱乐、智能助手等可增强智能体验的功能集成,从而为用户提供更好的使用体验。为了了解本申请实施例提供的无线音频设备组件,以下结合附图对其具体设置方式进行详细说明。
参照图2,图2为本申请一种实施例提供的无线音频设备组件的系统框图。在本申请中,无线音频设备组件可以包括收纳盒1和至少一个无线音频设备2,该至少一个无线音频设备2可收纳于收纳盒1中。其中,收纳盒1中可设置有多个功能模块,示例性的,可以为电池1001、通信模块1002、配对模块1003、电源管理模块1004、状态指示灯1005、在位检测传感器1006、微动开关1007、存储器1008、音频设备接口1009等。
本申请的收纳盒1可以与外部终端设备3进行有线或者无线通信连接,具体实施时,可通过启动配对模块1003,以使收纳盒1中的通信模块1002向外部终端设备3发射信号,或者接收来自外部终端设备3的通信模块3001发射的信号,从而实现二者之间的通信连接。收纳盒1中的中央处理器(center processing unit,CPU 10010)可对其接收到的信号进行处理和分析后,发送至无线音频设备2,或者通过存储器1008进行储存。可以理解的是,在本申请一些实施例中,配对模块1003也可作为实现收纳盒1与无线音频设备2之间的 进行匹配的开关。
另外,收纳盒1还可以设置有按钮10011,该按钮10011示例性的可作为收纳盒1的电源管理模块1004的开关,通过按压该按钮10011可使电源管理模块1004对收纳盒1的电池进行控制。电源管理模块1004对收纳盒1的电池的控制,示例性的可为对电池1001的电量进行监控、控制收纳盒1的电池1001进行充电,或者为无线音频设备2进行供电等。可以理解的是,在本申请其它可能的实施例中,按钮10011还可以作为其它功能模块的开关,其可根据具体需要将按钮10011与对应的功能模块进行匹配连接即可。
而状态指示灯1005可起到对收纳盒1的工作状态进行指示的作用,在本申请各实施例中,该状态指示灯1005在对收纳盒1的工作状态进行指示的过程中,其可以但不限于呈常亮状态,也可呈连续的闪烁状态,或者被点亮设定时间后熄灭。例如,在收纳盒1与外部终端设备3进行匹配的过程中,状态指示灯1005处于闪烁状态,当二者完成通信连接时,状态指示灯1005处于常亮的状态。又例如,在收纳盒1充电完成时,状态指示灯1005为常亮状态;在收纳盒1为无线音频设备2进行充电的起始阶段,状态指示灯1005闪烁设定时间后熄灭。另外,状态指示灯1005除了可通过其状态形式对收纳盒1的工作状态进行指示外,还可通过灯光的颜色对收纳盒1的工作状态进行区分。
在本申请中,无线音频设备2与收纳盒1之间的连接是否到位可通过在位检测传感器1006进行检测。另外,在位检测传感器1006检测的结果也可通过状态指示灯1005进行指示。
继续参照图2,无线音频设备2中可以集成有电池2001、麦克风2002、扬声器2003、通信模块2004、交互控制模块2005等,在本申请另外一些实施例中,无线音频设备2还可以集成有佩戴传感器以及操控传感器等部件。另外,无线音频设备2还具有音频设备接口2006,该音频设备接口2006可与收纳盒1中的音频设备接口1009相连接,以实现无线音频设备2与收纳盒1之间的信号交互。
可以理解的是,当无线音频设备2为两个以上时,图2中示出了两个无线音频设备2与收纳盒1相连接的状态。此时,可使收纳盒1中的音频设备接口1009与该两个以上的无线音频设备2的音频设备接口2006一一对应设置,从而使每个无线音频设备2的音频设备接口2006,能够与一个音频设备接口1009对应连接,以实现各个无线音频设备2与收纳盒1之间的独立配对连接,其可以减少无线音频设备2之间的相互干扰。
继续参照图2,本申请的无线音频设备组件还可以包括配件4,该配件4示例性的可用于穿戴式健康检测领域。其中,配件4中可集成有健康检测模块,该健康检测模块包括但不限于听诊传感器、心率传感器、压力脉搏波传感器、人体温度传感器、心电图传感器、生物电阻抗传感器等传感器中的一种或多种。
另外,在配件4中还可以集成有其它可能的功能模块,例如模数转换模块4002、电源模块4003、交互控制模块4004、ID生成模块4005以及通信模块4006等。
如图2所示,配件4的配件接口4007与收纳盒1中的配件接口10012通信连接,这样,配件4检测到的数据可传输至收纳盒1、无线音频设备2和外部终端设备3中的至少一个进行处理。另外,用户可根据自身需求选配需要的配件4随身携带,从而可进行定期或不定期的健康检测,采集健康数据并记录,进而通过检测算法进行自动诊断,另外,还可通过无线音频设备2将传感信息和诊断结果播报给用户。在本申请一些实施例中,配件4在执行单次健康测量的过程中,还可以通过无线音频设备2进行音频提示,例如提示用 户移动配件4的位置或者手握方式等,使测量结果更加有效。
在本申请另外一些实施例中,配件4还可用于音频交互领域。其中,配件4的配件接口4007在与收纳盒1的配件接口10012通信连接时,配件4搜集到的外部传感信息和控制信息可用于与所连接的无线音频设备2进行交互。示例性的,配件4可集成惯性传感器,以用在虚拟现实场景。具体使用时,用户手握连接有配件4的收纳盒1作为控制器,借助外部显示设备以及无线音频设备2本身,计算声源方位,实现立体声播放等功能。
参照图3,图3为通过收纳盒1对配件4进行充电的电路系统框图。该电路系统主要包括两部分,分别为配件电路和收纳盒电路。由于收纳盒1中的电池1001可为收纳盒1和配件4进行供电,因此,在配件4中可不设置独立的电池,以节省相应的电源管理电路成本。在通过收纳盒1的电池1001对配件4进行供电时,收纳盒1的CPU 10010通过开关管10013控制电池1001到收纳盒1的配件接口10012之间的连通性,从而可用于控制电池1001与配件4之间的导通状态。二极管10014用于保护开关管10013和电池1001,防止配件4的电流反向灌入。在收纳盒1的配件接口10012和配件4的配件接口4007对接后,充电电流从收纳盒1的电池1001流入配件4,配件4端可采用超级电容4008进行电量存储,其具有体积小、充电速度快、充电控制电路简单的特点。配件4通过超级电容4008存储的电量可通过二极管4009为配件4的功能电路40010进行供电,从而实现相应的配件功能。
一并参照图3和图4,图4为本申请一种实施例的收纳盒1的电路系统框图。收纳盒1的电路系统可以包括上述实施例中的CPU 10010、存储器1008、电池1001、开关管10013、配件接口10012、微动开关1007、状态指示灯1005、电源管理模块1004和通信模块1002。其中,通信模块1002可以包括蓝牙模块10021和天线10022,存储器1008、开关管10013、微动开关1007、状态指示灯1005、电源管理模块1004、蓝牙模块10021均可与CPU 10010进行直接的通信连接,电源管理模块1004可提供对电池1001电量的监控以及充电过程的管理;CPU 10010可控制开关管10013打开,以使电池1001能够通过配件接口10012向配件4充电;另外,蓝牙模块10021和天线10022可用于与外部终端设备3以及无线音频设备2的通信。
为了对收纳盒1对配件4进行充电的过程有进一步的了解,可参照图5,图5为本申请一个可能的实施例提供的收纳盒1对配件4进行充电的电路系统。配件4的功能电路40010(可参照图3)通常可以包括传感器4001和相应的放大器400101、用于信号调理的滤波器400102、模数转换器400103(A/D转换器)以及存储器400104等。在该电路系统中,数字信号可通过配件接口10012传输至收纳盒1的CPU 10010;当配件4作为驱动功能模块时,配件接口4007连接到配件4中的驱动器400105,以驱动执行器400106进行相应变化。
采用该电路系统,当收纳盒1触发配件4的功能时,CPU 10010控制开关管10013打开,使电池1001通过配件接口10012向配件4充电,配件4中的超级电容4008在短时间内接收电能并储存起来,存储的电能足够配件4执行一次其对应功能。下次使用配件4时,再次打开开关管10013,重复充电过程。
采用本申请提供的无线音频设备组件,由于配件4和至少一个无线音频设备2都与收纳盒1通信连接。这样,配件4可将传感数据、交互控制信息、配件ID等信息等传递至收纳盒1。收纳盒1的CPU 10010对数据进行处理后,将接收到的信息传输至与其配对的 无线音频设备2,或通过通信模块传递至外部终端设备3。同时,无线音频设备2和外部终端设备3的数据信息也可通过收纳盒1的通信模块1002和CPU 10010进行处理后,发送到配件4进行处理。由此可见,在本申请中,收纳盒1的功能得到有效的扩展,其可提升用户使用体验。
可以理解的是,由于无线音频设备1的体积通常较小,其很难集成满足各种需求的部件。通过对收纳盒1的功能进行扩展,还可以将用于实现无线音频设备1音频功能的部件设置于收纳盒1,以在不对无线音频设备1的体积进行改变的基础上,丰富音频设备1的音频体验。
在本申请一些实施例中,还可以在盒盖12中集成一些可能的传感器,并使该传感器能够与无线音频设备2以及配件4中的至少一个进行交互,从而使收纳盒1的功能得到进一步的扩展。
在对本申请提供的无线音频设备组件中各部分的功能进行了解之后,接下来对无线音频设备组件的具体结构,以及各部分之间的具体连接关系进行介绍。
参照图6,图6展示了本申请一种实施例提供的无线音频设备2组件的结构示意图。在图6所示的实施例中,收纳盒1可以包括本体11和盒盖12,其中,盒盖12与本体11可铰接,以使盒盖12能够绕其与本体11的铰接点转动,来实现盒盖12的开合。在一些实施例中,盒盖12还可与本体11可拆卸连接。
本体11上设置有第一槽位1101,该第一槽位1101用于收纳无线音频设备2。第一槽位1101可与无线音频设备2一一对应设置,以使每个无线音频设备2可对应插设于一个第一槽位1101内,从而可避免各无线音频设备2之间碰撞造成磨损。在另外一些实施例中,还可以使第一槽位1101为一个,以使至少一个无线音频设备2均收纳于该一个第一槽位1101中,以简化收纳盒1的结构。
可继续参照图6,第一槽位1101可以设置于收纳盒1的本体11的任意位置,收纳盒1的盒盖12靠近第一槽位1101设置。图6展示了盒盖12处于打开状态时的无线音频设备2组件的结构,当盒盖12打开时,可将第一槽位1101暴露出,从而可将无线音频设备2从第一槽位1101内取出,或者将无线音频设备2插设于第一槽位1101内。在本申请中,为了便于描述,可将收纳盒1的本体11的用于设置第一槽位1101的面称为本体11的第一表面1103,与第一表面1103相连接的面称为本体11的第二表面1104。可以理解的是,本体11的第二表面1104可以作为本体11的外观面。
当盒盖12与本体11盖合时,第一槽位1101可位于盒盖12与本体11形成的容置空间内,以使第一槽位1101隐藏于收纳盒1内,从而可起到对插设于第一槽位1101内的无线音频设备2的收纳作用,并且可避免无线音频设备2的掉落。另外,在盒盖12与本体11盖合时,还可使盒盖12与插设于第一槽位1101内的无线音频设备2相抵接,从而减少无线音频设备2在收纳盒1内的晃动。
又由于收纳盒1可用于为无线音频设备2进行充电,在本申请一些实施例中,还可将第一槽位1101作为无线音频设备2的充电槽,从而将收纳和充电的功能集成于第一槽位1101内,以在将无线音频设备2插接于第一槽位1101内时,使收纳盒1对该无线音频设备2进行充电,以有利于简化收纳盒1的结构。另外,收纳盒1的在位检测传感器1006也可以设置于第一槽位1101内,以实现对无线音频设备2在第一槽位1101内的插接位置进行检测。
可以理解的是,当第一槽位1101为多个时,例如为图6中所示的两个,该多个第一槽位1101可相靠近设置,从而可使该多个第一槽位1101均可隐藏于盒盖12与本体11之间形成的容置空间内。
继续参照图6,在具体将配件4与收纳盒1进行连接时,示例性的,可将配件4与收纳盒1的本体11连接,且配件4的至少部分暴露在收纳盒1的外部,以使配件4方便应用于需要与用户接触的场景下(例如健康检测场景),以提高检测精度。具体实施时,收纳盒1的本体11还可以设置有第二槽位(图中未示出),从而可使配件4通过该第二槽位实现与本体11的固定连接。另外,由上述实施例可知,配件4的配件接口4007可通过与收纳盒1中的配件接口10012连接,来实现二者之间的通信连接,在本申请一个可能的实施例中,收纳盒1的配件接口10012可集成于第二槽位内,以简化本体11的结构。
参照图7,图7为本申请一个可能的实施例的无线音频设备组件的结构示意图。在该实施例中,配件4与收纳盒1之间可拆卸连接,这样可根据具体需要将配件4安装于收纳盒1,或者从收纳盒1上拆卸下来进行更换,从而使用户能够选择是否携带配件4,以及选择满足自身需求的配件4,以提升用户体验。
配件4与收纳盒1之间的可拆卸方式有很多,示例性的,可参照图8,图8为本申请一种实施例的无线音频设备组件的结构示意图。在该实施例中,第二槽位1102可以设置于收纳盒1的本体11的第二表面1104,以使配件4能够在收纳盒1的第二表面1104与之连接。可以理解的是,在该实施例中,第二槽位1102与第一槽位1101位于本体11的不同表面,从而可避免第一槽位1101和第二槽位1102在具体设置时的相互干扰。
继续参照图8,配件4可以包括检测部41和安装部42,其中,检测部41可暴露于收纳盒1的外部,这样,配件4所集成的传感器可设置于检测部41内。安装部42可插接于本体11的第二槽位1102,从而通过安装部42与本体11的固定连接,来实现配件4与收纳盒1的固定连接。
为了便于对本申请的无线音频设备2组件各组成部分的连接关系进行理解,先对无线音频设备2组件各组成部分的具体结构进行介绍。参照图9,图9为本申请一种可能的实施例的无线音频设备组件各组成部分的爆炸图。一并参照图8和图9,在收纳盒1中,可以设置有第一托架1105和第二托架1106,其中,第一槽位1101设置于第一托架1105,且在对应第一槽位1101处可设置有容纳腔11051,该容纳腔11051可呈筒状设置,以便于无线音频设备2的收纳。第二托架1106可对第一托架1105起到支撑的作用,在第二托架1106上可设置与容纳腔11051的外轮廓相匹配的卡槽11061,以使容纳腔11051能够卡接于第二托架1106,从而提高第一托架1105的结构稳定性。
另外,继续参照图9,收纳盒1中还设置有收纳盒主电路板1107,上述实施例中的CPU、在位检测传感器、存储器、数模转换模块、通信模块等均可设置于该收纳盒主印制电路板1107上。在收纳盒1的底部(与第一表面相对的一侧)设置有接口模块1108,该接口模块1108可以但不限于为通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口模块。接口模块1108可以包括相连接的接口插座11081、接口转换电路板11082以及排线11083。排线11083例如可以但不限于为软质排线,从而可便于该排线1083与收纳盒主电路板1107的连接,以实现接口模块1108与收纳盒主电路板1107之间的通信连接。
收纳盒1中还具有接口电路板1109,以及设置于接口电路板1109的电触点插座11091a和电触点插座11091b。可以理解的是,上述第一托架1105和第二托架1106组装好后可以 插接于电触点插座11091a和电触点插座11091b,从而便于电触点插座11091a和电触点插座11091b为插入第一托架1105的无线音频设备2进行充电,或实现无线音频设备2与收纳盒1之间的通信。
继续参照图9,收纳盒1的电池1001可通过电池固定件11010进行固定,为了对收纳盒1的电池1001进行充电,在收纳盒1中还可以设置有无线充电底座11012、充电线圈11013以及充电线11014。其中,充电线11014可与电池1001相连接,以实现对电池1001的充电。
值得一提的是,以上介绍的收纳盒1的各部件均可容置于收纳盒1的壳体11015内,从而可对各部件起到保护的作用。另外,通过将各部件容置于收纳盒1的壳体11015,还可提高收纳盒1的外观一体性和美观性。
为了实现配件4与收纳盒1的可拆卸连接,可一并参照图9和图10,图10展示了一种实施例的用于实现配件4与收纳盒1可拆卸连接的主要结构,其省略了无线音频设备2以及收纳盒1的其它结构。在该实施例中,收纳盒1的用于与配件4连接的部分主要是与盒盖12相配合运动的传动机构,传动机构位于收纳盒的盒体内,且传动机构可以包括连接臂11016、驱动部件11017以及卡接部件11018。其中,连接臂11016可用于连接收纳盒1的盒盖12和驱动部件11017,具体实施时,连接臂11016的一端固定于收纳盒1的盒盖12,另一端设置有第一抵接部110161。
驱动部件11017设置于连接臂11016与卡接部件11018之间,且驱动部件11017沿连接臂11016向卡接部件11018的方向延伸。驱动部件11017的靠近连接臂11016的一端设置有第二抵接部110171,该第二抵接部110171可与第一抵接部110161相抵接。驱动部件11017的靠近卡接部件11018的一端设置有凸起110172,该凸起110172可与卡接部件11018相抵接。
卡接部件11018开设有卡孔110181,该卡孔110181为贯穿孔。另外,卡孔110181可包括相连通的第一孔位110181a和第二孔位110181b,其中,第一孔位110181a相对于第二孔位110181b靠近驱动部件11017设置。可以理解的是,在本申请中,第一孔位110181a可为圆孔、条形孔等规则形状的孔,也可以为异形孔,只要能够使配件4的安装部42穿过即可。第二孔位110181b可为圆孔、条形孔等规则形状的孔,也可以为异形孔,只要能够与配件4的安装部42相卡接,从而可避免配件4从卡接部件11018上脱落。另外,第一孔位110181a和第二孔位110181b的形状可以相同也可以不同,示例性的,在图10所示的实施例中,第一孔位110181a为圆形孔,第二孔位110181b为条形孔。
另外,连接臂11016可绕第一转轴110162转动,该第一转轴110162可固定于如图9所示的收纳盒1的壳体11015。由于连接臂11016与盒盖12固定连接,因此,盒盖12在与本体11盖合或者打开的过程中,也可以第一转轴110162作为轴进行转动,以使盒盖12与本体11相铰接,从而有利于简化收纳盒1的结构。驱动部件11017可绕第二转轴110173转动,且驱动部件11017的转动方向与连接臂11016的转动方向相反。另外,第二转轴110173也可固定于如图9所示的收纳盒1的壳体11015。
值得一提的是,在本申请实施例中,驱动部件11017的转动方向与连接臂11016的转动方向相反是指:当连接臂11016顺时针转动时,驱动部件11017可逆时针转动;当连接臂11016逆时针转动时,驱动部件11017可顺时针转动。
除了上述结构外,可继续参照图10,收纳盒1中还设置有插接底座11019,插接底座 11019与卡接部件11018设置于驱动部件11017的同一侧,插接底座11019设置有插接槽110191,插接槽110191的槽口朝向卡接部件11018。可一并参照图9和图10,在本申请该实施例中,第二槽位1102可由开设于壳体11015的开口110201、卡接部件11018的卡孔11081以及插接槽110191构成。
另外,在插接槽110191内布置有多个触点110192,该多个触点110192可通过引线与收纳盒主电路板电连接。在对触点110192进行具体设置时,触点110192可采用弹片的形式,以通过弹片的弹性形变提高触点110192与插设于插接槽110191内的结构之间的接触可靠性。在本申请中,弹片的材质可以为金属,这样可有效的提高触点110192的有效接触面积,进而提高其接触的可靠性。
在本申请中,不对触点110192的具体数量进行限定,示例性的可为3个,该3个触点110192中的一个与正电源线连接,一个与负电源线连接,另一个与通信线连接,以能够实现供电以及通信的简单功能。另外,对于需要实现功能较复杂的场景,还可以设置更多的触点110192,并使每个触点110192各通过一条引线与收纳盒主电路板连接即可。
一并参照图10和图11,图11为本申请一种实施例的配件4的结构示意图。在本申请中,安装部42设置于检测部41的一个表面,示例性的,可设置于检测部41的朝向收纳盒1的本体11的表面。另外,安装部42可以包括连接部4201和接触部4202,接触部4202通过连接部4201与检测部41连接,则接触部4202设置于连接部4201的背离检测部41的端部。其中,接触部4202在检测部41上的投影面积,可大于连接部4201在检测部41上的投影面积。另外,接触部4202的背离检测部41的表面可以设置有接触区42021,接触区42021可为沿安装部42的周向间隔分布的多个。
可以理解的是,接触部4202的接触区42021可作为上述实施例中提到的配件4的配件接口,而插接槽110191内的触点110192可作为收纳盒1的配件接口。为了使配件4能够与收纳盒1通信连接,可以使接触区42021的数量与插接槽110191内的触点110192的数量相同,以便于在安装部42插接于插接槽110191内时,使接触区42021与触点110192一一对应的接触并进行通信连接。另外,接触区42021与触点110192的数量也可以不同,具体实施时,可使触点110192比接触区42021的数量多,以使每个接触区42021能够与一个触点110192对应接触,从而能够通过收纳盒1对配件4进行供电,同时实现配件4的功能,以及配件4与收纳盒1之间的通信连接。
在对配件4与收纳盒1可拆卸连接的主要结构进行了了解之后,接下来结合附图,对将配件4从收纳盒1上拆卸下来的过程进行详细说明,而配件4与收纳盒1组装的过程与上述拆卸过程相反,在本申请中不进行赘述。
参照图12,图12展示了本申请一种实施例的配件4与收纳盒1组装状态下的剖面图。在图12所示的实施例中,收纳盒1的盒盖12与本体11处于闭合的状态,此时,连接臂11016的第一抵接部110161与本体11的第一表面1103之间的距离最远。另外,从图12中可以看出,传动机构中,驱动部件11017的第二抵接部110171相对于连接臂11016的第一抵接部110161靠近收纳盒1的本体11的第一表面1103设置,驱动部件11017的凸起110172朝向背离本体11的第一表面1103凸出于驱动部11017的表面。卡接部件11018以及插接底座11019设置于驱动部件11017的背离本体11的第一表面1103的一侧。
继续参照图12,为了使卡接部件11018能够在收纳盒1的本体11内稳定运动,可以在本体11的壳体11015上设置滑槽110151,该滑槽110151可设置于壳体11015的内部, 且第二槽位1102的开设于壳体11015的开口110201与滑槽110151连通,卡接部件11018可在该滑槽110151内沿朝向或者背离本体11的第一表面1103的方向滑动。
另外,在滑槽110151内还可以设置有弹性件110152,该弹性件110152位于卡接部件11018的背离本体11的第一表面1103的一侧,且弹性件110152与卡接部件11018弹性抵接。在本申请一些实施例中,弹性件110152例如可以为弹簧,这时可在卡接部件11018的背离本体11的第一表面1103的端面设置有第一限位柱110182。另外,还可以在滑槽110151内设置第二限位柱1101511,该第二限位柱1101511朝向本体11的第一表面1103的方向凸出于滑槽110151的槽壁。在本申请一些实施例中,第一限位柱110182和第二限位柱1101511的轴线可以重合。这样,弹簧可分别套设于第一限位柱110182和第二限位柱1101511,从而可起到对弹簧进行限位的作用,以提高弹簧运动的可靠性。
在配件4与收纳盒1处于组装状态下时,配件4的安装部42穿过第二槽位1102的开口110201和卡接部件11018,并插设于插接底座11019的插接槽110191内。一并参照图11和图12,此时安装部42的接触部4202容置于插接槽110191内,接触部4202的接触区42021与插接槽110191内的触点110192对应接触。由于插接槽110191内的触点110192可采用弹片的形式,在安装部42插接于插接槽110191内时,弹片可发生一定的弹性形变,从而使触点110192与接触部4202稳定的接触。
一并参照图10和图12,在本申请一些实施例中,配件4可与收纳盒1的本体11通过卡接的方式进行固定。具体实施时,配件4的安装部42可穿过第一孔位110181a,并卡接于第二孔位11081b。参照图12,在配件4与收纳盒1的组装状态下,安装部42的连接部4201可穿入卡接部件11018的第二孔位110181b,接触部4202和检测部41位于卡接部件11018的两侧。另外,接触部4202在卡接部件11018上的投影的至少部分位于第二孔位110181b的轮廓范围之外。这样,接触部4202可与卡接部件11018相卡接,从而可避免配件4从收纳盒1的本体11上脱落。
另外,一并参照图11和图12,在安装部42的与检测部41的连接处设置有密封圈43,该密封圈43可套设与连接部4201。另外该密封圈43可卡设于第二槽位1102的开口110201处,该密封圈43可以但不限于为橡胶圈。密封圈43可与第二槽位1102开设于壳体的开口110201过盈配合,从而可提高配件4与收纳盒1的连接可靠性,并且还可避免液体和灰尘等进入收纳盒1内,对其内部结构造成腐蚀,从而可有效的延长无线音频设备组件的使用寿命。可以理解的是,在一些实施例中,在收纳盒1不带有配件4的状态下,可通过密封塞将第二槽位1102的开口110201封堵,以起到对收纳盒1内部结构的保护作用。
参照图13,图13展示了收纳盒1的盒盖12打开至第一转动位的状态。图13中的箭头表示盒盖12的打开方向,在本申请该实施例中,以将盒盖12沿顺时针方向打开为例进行说明。在将盒盖12由图12中的盖合状态打开至图13所示的状态的过程中,盒盖12带动连接臂11016绕第一转轴110162沿顺时针方向转动。连接臂11016的第一抵接部110161朝向靠近驱动部件11017的第二抵接部110171的方向运动,但在图13所示的状态下,第一抵接部110161与第二抵接部110171未接触;或者第一抵接部110161与第二抵接部110171相接触但是二者之间没有作用力,或者二者之间的作用力不足以带动驱动部件11017运动。
在本申请一些实施例中,还可以通过合理的设计,使盒盖12能够悬停在图13所示的位置。这样,在对无线音频设备2进行取放的过程中,可避免对配件4与收纳盒1的连接 造成影响。
当进一步增大收纳盒1的盒盖12的打开角度时,可参照图14,图14展示了收纳盒1的盒盖12打开至第二转动位时的状态。这时,连接臂11016的第一抵接部110161与驱动部件11017的第二抵接部110171之间的作用力带动驱动部件11017绕第二转轴110173沿逆时针方向转动。同时,驱动部件11017的凸起110172与卡接部件11018相抵接,并推动卡接部件11018在滑槽110151内,沿背离本体11的第一表面1103的方向滑动,直至卡接部件11018的第一孔位110181a(可参照图10)与配件4的接触部4202位置相对。
可继续参照图14,在上述卡接部件11018滑动的过程中,卡接部件11018挤压弹性件110152,弹性件110152积蓄弹性力。另外,还可以对弹性件110152的弹性系数进行合理的设置,以在弹性件110152被压缩至最大压缩长度时,卡接部的第一孔位110181a与配件4的安装部42的接触部4202位置相对,此时,盒盖12无法继续打开至更大的角度,这样可有效的简化配件4与收纳盒1的拆卸过程。另外,还可使弹性件110152被压缩的过程中积蓄的弹性力能够通过卡接部件11018传递至整个传动机构,进而使传动机构能够在弹性件110152的弹性作用下运动至图13所示的状态。
参照图14,本申请上述实施例中提到的微动开关1007可以设置于驱动部件11017的靠近本体11的第一表面1103的一侧。具体实施时,微动开关1007可固定于本体11的第一表面1103,且微动开关1007可设置于驱动部件11017的第二抵接部110171的靠近本体11的第一表面1003的一侧。这样,在驱动部件11017绕第二转轴110173转动的过程中,第二抵接部110171可触碰微动开关1007,微动开关1007通过连接线将触发信号传递到收纳盒1的收纳盒主电路板上的CPU进行相应处理。另外,当传动机构回到图13所示的状态时,驱动部件11017与微动开关1007之间不接触,微动开关1007复位。
一并参照图14和图15,图15展示了将配件4从收纳盒1的本体11上进行拆卸的过程。由于在图14所示的状态下,配件4的接触部4202与卡接部件11018的第一孔位110181a相对,卡接部件11018不再对配件4的安装部42的运动进行限制,因此可直接将配件4沿从插接底座11019到第一孔位110181a的方向从第二槽位1102中抽出。图16展示了配件4与收纳盒1完成拆卸时的状态,此时传动机构在弹性件110152的弹性力作用下运动,并使盒盖12恢复至第一转动位,且在无外力作用下处于悬停的状态。
由上述各实施例的介绍可以理解,采用本申请实施例的无线音频设备组件,在盒盖12处于闭合状态下,配件4可通过与卡接部件11018的卡接来实现与收纳盒1的本体11的固定连接。另外,由于传动机构的连接臂11016与盒盖12固定连接,这样还可以通过盒盖12的打开带动传动机构运动,以使卡接部件11018能够运动至避让开配件4的安装部42的位置,从而可将配件4从收纳盒1的本体11上拆卸下来。而配件4与本体11的组装,也是通过盒盖12的打开以及闭合动作来实现的。因此,采用本申请的无线音频设备组件可有效的简化配件4与收纳盒1的拆装过程,从而便于用户根据自身需要选择是否携带配件4。
另外,在本申请中,还可以通过将可实现不同功能的各个配件4的安装部42的结构进行统一。这样,可通过对配件4的更换来满足用户的使用需求,从而可提升用户的使用体验。
除了可以采用上述实施例中介绍的盒盖12在两个工作状态之间的切换带动传动机构运动,来实现配件4与收纳盒1的本体11之间的安装以及拆卸外,在本申请一些实施例中, 传动机构的运动与盒盖12的开合之间还可以没有联动关系,从而便于盒盖1与传动机构的单独设计,其有利于简化收纳盒1的结构。
具体实施时,可以参照图17,图17为本申请一个可能的实施例的无线音频设备组件的结构示意图。在该实施例中,配件4的具体结构可以参照上述实施例进行设置,在此不进行赘述。在具体设置传动机构时,传动机构可以包括行程开关110201,该行程开关110201可由开设于本体11的壳体11015的通孔110155露出,这样,用户可通过将该行程开关110201向本体11内部按压来触发传动机构运动。
可一并参照图17和图18,图18展示了配件4与收纳盒1组装状态的剖面图。在本申请该实施例中,用于露出行程开关11021的通孔110155与第二槽位1102的开口110201可以相对设置。在本体11的壳体11015内部还设置有开关盒110154,该开关盒110154罩设于通孔110155。行程开关11021可以包括按压部110211和传动部110212,其中,按压部110211的至少部分容置于开关盒,且按压部110211的至少部分可伸入通孔110155内;传动部110212与按压部110211固定连接,且传动部110212自按压部110211向壳体110155的内部延伸,并伸出至开关盒110154的外部。另外,传动部110212的背离按压部110211的一端还可以设置有挤压部110213,挤压部110213的形状可以但不限于为球状、柱状等。
如图18所示,开关盒110154的朝向通孔110155的侧面上还可以设置有缓冲部11022,按压部110211向开关盒110154内运动设定的行程后,可与该缓冲部11022接触,其可避免按压部110211与开关盒110154之间发生撞击,从而可减小二者之间的损坏。另外,缓冲部11022可对按压部110211起到一定的缓冲作用,从而有利于提升用户按压行程开关11021的手感,以提升用户体验。
继续参照图18,在该实施例中,收纳盒1也包括插接底座11019,该插接底座11019的具体结构可参照上述实施例进行设置,在此不进行赘述。传动机构还可以包括剪刀脚结构11023,该剪刀脚结构11023包括相铰接的第一卡接脚110231和第二卡接脚110232,两个卡接脚的铰接轴110233固定于插接底座11019的槽壁上,示例性的,可以固定于插接底座11019的靠近行程开关11021的槽壁上。另外,第一卡接脚110231和第二卡接脚110232的部分穿入插接底座11019的插接槽110191内,另一部分由插接底座11019的靠近行程开关11021的槽壁伸出至插接底座11019的外部。
第一卡接脚110231的穿入插接槽110191内的部分的端部可向两个卡接脚界定的区间内弯折形成第一卡钩,第二卡接脚110232的穿入插接槽110191内的部分的端部可向两个卡接脚界定的区间内弯折形成第二卡钩。由图18可以看出,配件4的安装部的接触部在伸入至插接底座11019时,可插设于第一卡接脚110231和第二卡接脚110232界定的区域内,并可与第一卡钩和第二卡钩相卡接。另外,第一卡接脚110231的穿入插接底座11019的部分和第二卡接脚110232的穿入插接底座11019的部分之间通过弹性件110234连接,该弹性件110234可以但不限于为弹簧,且该弹性件110234处于拉伸状态。继续参照图18,在本申请该实施例中,行程开关11021自通孔110155向壳体11内运动可增大第一卡接脚110231和第二卡接脚110232之间的夹角。具体实施时,行程开关11021的挤压部110213可容置于第一卡接脚110231和第二卡接脚110232的伸出至插接底座11019的外部的部分界定的区间内,且挤压部110213可对两个卡接脚施加挤压力,以增大两个卡接脚之间的夹角。
一并参照图18和图19,图19展示了行程开关11021被按压时剪刀脚结构11023的状 态。按压行程开关11021,行程开关11021的挤压部110213挤压第一卡接脚110231和第二卡接脚110232,以使第一卡接脚110231和第二卡接脚110232分别绕铰接轴110233转动,从而增大第一卡接脚110231和第二卡接脚110232之间的夹角。在该过程中,弹性件110234被进一步拉伸,并积蓄弹性拉力。
继续参照图19,在本申请一些实施例中,还可以在插接底座11019的朝向行程开关11021的一侧表面设置限位部11024,当行程开关11024朝向剪刀脚结构11023运动至设定行程距离时,挤压部110213与限位部11024相抵接,从而使行程开关11021不能继续朝向剪刀脚结构11023运动,第一卡接脚110231和第二卡接脚110232之间的夹角不再继续增大。通过设置限位部11024,可以避免挤压部110213直接撞击插接底座11019,从而可有效的延长行程开关11021和插接底座11019的使用寿命。另外,第一卡接脚110231和第二卡接脚110232之间的夹角增大到一定程度后不再继续增大,其可有效的避免第一卡接脚110231和第二卡接脚110232对插接底座11019的插接槽110191的槽壁进行撞击,以降低插接底座11019损坏的风险。可以理解的是,在该实施例中,限位部11024可以为凸出于插接底座11019的表面的凸起结构,该凸起的高度可以根据插接底座11019的开口和/或插接底座11019的插接槽110191的内部空间进行设置。
一并参照图19和图20,图20展示了配件4从收纳盒1上拆卸下来的状态。当第一卡接脚110231和第二卡接脚110232之间的夹角足够大时,第一卡接脚110231的第一卡勾1102311与第二卡接脚110232的第二卡勾1102321之间的缝隙可避让安装部42的接触部4202。这时,可将配件4沿插接底座11019到第二槽位1102的开口110201方向,从第二槽位1102内抽出即可实现图20所示的配件4与收纳盒1拆卸的状态。
继续参照图20,在将配件4从收纳盒1上拆卸下来之后,第一卡接脚110231和第二卡接脚110232在弹性件110234的弹性力作用下绕铰接轴110233沿使二者之间的夹角减小的方向转动。在此过程中,第一卡接脚110231和第二卡接脚110232对挤压部施加一个朝向通孔110155方向的作用力,以使行程开关11021朝向通孔110155的方向运动,并伸入至通孔110155内,从而使传动机构恢复至图18所示的状态,以便于用户后续对于该无线音频设备组件的使用。可以理解的是,在本申请该实施例中,配件4与收纳盒1的组装过程与上述拆卸过程相反,在此不进行赘述。
另外,参照图20,上述实施例中提到的微动开关1007还可以设置于开关盒110154的朝向通孔110155的侧面上,此时,行程开关11021还可以用于微动开关1007的触发。具体实施时,按压部110211自通孔110155向开关盒110154内运动的过程中触碰微动开关1007,微动开关1007通过连接线将触发信号传递到收纳盒1的收纳盒主电路板上的CPU进行相应处理。另外,可以理解的是,当传动机构回到图18所示的状态时,按压部110211与微动开关1007之间不接触,微动开关1007复位。
采用本申请该实施例的无线音频设备组件,可通过按压设置于收纳盒1的本体11上的行程开关,即可实现配件4与收纳盒1的安装以及拆卸。因此,采用该实施例的无线音频设备组件可有效的简化配件4与收纳盒1的拆装过程,从而便于用户根据自身需要选择是否携带配件4。另外,在本申请中,还可以通过将可实现不同功能的各个配件4的安装部42的结构进行统一。这样,可通过对配件4的更换来满足用户的使用需求,从而可提升用户的使用体验。
参照图21,图21为本申请另外一个可能的实施例的无线音频设备组件的组装结构示 意图。可以理解的是,在图21中省略了无线音频设备。在该实施例中,上述设置于收纳盒1的本体11上的按钮10011可以作为配件触发开关,此时,该配件触发开关可用于对收纳盒1对配件4的供电,以及配件4与收纳盒1之间的通信进行控制。示例性的,在不触发配件4功能的情况下,配件触发开关处于关闭状态,此时收纳盒1停止对配件4的供电,从而可实现零电量损耗,降低功耗。另外,在触发配件4功能时,可通过开启配件触发开关,以在较短的时间内实现收纳盒1对配件4的供电,随后可实现二者之间的通信。这样,配件4自身可不设置电池,其可节约配件4因为长时间未使用而需要充电所花费的时间。
另外,在该实施例中,配件4的安装部42与收纳盒1的本体11的第一表面1103可拆卸连接。在具体将安装部42与本体11的第一表面1103进行可拆卸连接设置时,可一并参照图21和图22,图22为配件4与收纳盒1处于拆卸状态的结构示意图。如图22所示,在该实施例中,第一槽位1101与第二槽位1102均设置于本体11的第一表面1103,且相靠近设置。这样,在将盒盖12盖合时,第一槽位1101和第二槽位1102均可隐藏于盒盖12与本体11形成的容置空间内,其可有效的提升收纳盒1的外观一体性。
一并参照图22和图23,图23为图22的A处的局部结构放大图。在该实施例中,第二槽位1102的至少一个槽壁上可设置有第一限位结构110202,在图23所示的实施例中,第二槽位1102的两个相对的槽壁上各设置有一个第一限位结构110202。
安装部42可包括与检测部41连接的连接部4201,以及设置于连接部4201的背离检测部41一端的接触部4202,其中,连接部4201可与检测部41的一个端部连接,在一个可能的实施例中,连接部4201还可与检测部41共平面设置。接触部4202所在的平面可与检测部41所在的平面呈设定角度,示例性的,接触部4202所在的平面与检测部41所在的平面之间可呈90°设置,以在安装部42与收纳盒1进行安装时,接触部4202可自连接部4201向收纳盒1一侧弯折。参照图23,在接触部4202上可设置有第二限位结构42021,其中,第一限位结构110202与第二限位结构42021可一一对应限位卡接,从而可避免安装于第二槽位1102的接触部4202在本体11的第一表面所在的平面内晃动。
在本申请一些实施例中,第一限位结构110202可为设置于第二槽位1102的槽壁上的凸起,第二限位结构42021可为设置于接触部4202上的凹槽;或者,也可以使第一限位结构110202为凹槽,第二限位结构42021为凸起,凸起与凹槽可限位卡接。可以理解的是,第一限位结构110202与第二限位结构42021还可以采用其它可能的设置方式,只要能够实现对接触部4202在第一表面1103所在平面内的限位即可。在该实施例中,配件4与收纳盒1的安装方向与无线音频设备插设于收纳盒1的方向相同,配件4从收纳盒1上拆卸的方向与无线音频设备拔出收纳盒1的方向相同。
一并参照图23和图24,图24展示了收纳盒1的内部结构。在第二槽位1102内还可设置有多个触点110192,该触点110192可采用触针的形式,该触针可从收纳盒1的本体11内伸出至第二槽位1102。另外,在本申请中,上述实施例的在位检测传感器1006也可采用触针的形式。其中,作为触点110192的触针,与作为在位检测传感器1006的触针可采用同样的封装形式,从而有利于简化收纳盒1的内部结构。参照图24,触点110192可以通过排线11020(例如软排线),连接至收纳盒主电路板1107的线缆连接座11071。在收纳盒主电路板1107上还设置有接口模块1108,该接口模块1108可作为充电接口,从而可用于实现对收纳盒1的充电。
继续参照图23和图24,在本申请该实施例中不对触点110192的具体数量进行限定, 例如可为图23中所示的3个。该3个触点110192中的一个可与正电源线连接,一个可与负电源线连接,另一个可与通信线连接,以能够实现供电以及通信的简单功能。另外,对于需要实现功能较复杂的场景,还可以设置更多的触点110192,并使每个触点110192各通过一条引线与收纳盒主电路板1107连接即可。
为了使配件4能够与收纳盒1进行通信连接,可参照图25,图25展示了本申请一种实施例的配件4的结构示意图。在配件4中,接触部4202设置有多个接触区42021,该多个接触区42021可与上述图23中的本体11的第二槽位1102内的触点110192一一对应设置。当然,也可使接触区42021与触点110192的数量不同,示例性的,使触点110192的数量大于接触区42021的数量,这样也可使每个接触区42021与对应的触点110192接触并进行通信连接,以能够实现对应的功能即可。
一并参照图25和图26,图26展示了本申请一种实施例的接触电路的结构示意图。在本申请中,接触区42021可以但不限于由焊盘形成,并且该焊盘为配件4的接触电路板40011的裸露的铜焊盘。其中,接触电路板40011可设置于接触部4202,在接触电路板40011上留有线缆插座40012,导线40013的一端与线缆插座40012连接,另一端通过电路板插座40014连接到配件主电路板40015上。配件主电路板40015可位于配件4的检测部的外壳44中,检测部可通过扣设于外壳44的后壳45进行密封,后壳45可采用软质橡胶或硅胶材质。这样,在配件4与收纳盒1组装后,后壳45可与收纳盒1接触,从而可以减小二者接触时的摩擦,进而减少对收纳盒1的磨损。
一并参照图25和图27,图27为本申请一种实施例的无线音频设备组件的剖面图。在配件4的检测部的外壳44中还可以设置有第一磁铁46,在收纳盒1的壳体11015内还可以设置有第二磁体。其中,第二磁铁110153可设置于收纳盒1的壳体11015的用于与配件4的检测部41相贴合的侧壁内侧。另外,第一磁铁46和第二磁铁110153的磁极设定为相反,这样,第一磁铁46和第二磁铁110153可隔空吸附,从而可避免配件4从收纳盒1上脱落。可以理解的是,在本申请实施例中,第一磁铁46可以设置于检测部41的背离接触部4202的一端,以提高配件4与收纳盒1连接的可靠性。
在本申请中,不对第一磁铁46和第二磁铁11015的数量进行限定,其可根据配件4以及收纳盒1的空间进行具体设置。另外,第一磁铁46和第二磁铁11015的形状可为圆形、方形、扇形等规则形状,也可以为非规则的形状,且二者的形状可以相同也可以不同。
另外,可继续参照图27,图27展示了盒盖12盖合状态下,盒盖12与配件4的接触部4202的位置关系。可以看出,盒盖12盖合时可对接触部4202进行挤压限位,从而可减小接触部4202的晃动,并可以避免配件4从收纳盒1上脱落。在一些实施例中,还可以在盒盖12的用于与接触部4202接触的部分设置可压缩变形的防水结构,例如泡棉,这样可在提高二者之间接触部分的密封性的同时,减小盒盖12对连接部4202的磨损。
在本申请上述实施例的无线音频设备组件中,通过在第二槽位1102和配件4的接触部4202之间进行限位设计,可实现配件4与收纳盒1的稳定连接,且二者之间的连接结构较为简单。另外,通过第二槽位1102内的触点110192与配件4的接触区42021进行通信连接,其可支持配件4的多功能扩展和灵活配置,这样可通过对包括不同功能模块的配件4的接触部4202的结构进行统一设计,从而使用户可根据自身需求对配件4进行更换,其有利于提升用户的使用体验。
而在无需配件4的场景下,由于第二槽位1102可容纳于盒盖12与本体11盖合时的容 置空间内,所以其也不会影响该收纳盒1的外观完整性和功能。从而使该无线音频设备组件能够满足多种用户的使用需求,其可避免开发多套不同的收纳盒1(有配件4接口、无配件4接口、不同配件4接口),节约了综合成本。
在对配件4与收纳盒1的结构,以及二者之间的可拆卸连接的方式进行了解之后,接下来对收纳盒1对配件4进行充电的过程进行介绍。参照图28,图28展示了本申请一个可能的实施例提供的收纳盒1对配件4进行充电的电路系统。在该实施例中,收纳盒1在对配件4进行充电时,需要经过模拟开关10015,模拟开关10015的导通由收纳盒1的CPU10010进行控制。在充电前期,首先通过CPU 10010控制模拟开关10015与电池1001导通,并使模拟开关10015与电池1001形成的连接线路作为电源线为配件4进行充电。由于不同配件4所需电量不同,即配件4类型与充电时间相关,这样可将不同配件4所需的充电电量与时间的对应关系表存储在收纳盒1中。这样,可根据配件4的类型进行计时,当充电到满足电量的设定时间时,CPU 10010断开模拟开关10015与电池1001之间连接,模拟开关10015切换到与CPU 10010的数字管脚导通的状态,该条连接线路可用于数据传输。
在配件4端,同样设置有一个模拟开关40020,该模拟开关40020的默认状态为与超级电容4008导通,并进行电量的存储。超级电容4008的正极连接比较器40017,当比较器40017判断超级电容4008的电压超过设定值时,表示电量充满,此时比较器40017控制模拟开关40020切换到与配件4的数字管脚导通的状态,示例性的,可切换到与存储器400104或驱动器400105导通的状态,以进行数据发送和接收。
采用本申请上述实施例的收纳盒1对配件4进行充电的电路系统,可以使配件4和收纳盒1之间的电源正极线和数据通信线通过模拟开关进行复用,从而可降低二者之间连接接口的复杂度,从而可提高系统的可靠性。
参照图29,图29为本申请一种实施例的收纳盒1的电路系统框图。在该实施例中,收纳盒1的电路系统可以包括上述实施例中的CPU 10010、存储器1008、电池1001、开关管10013、配件接口10012、微动开关1007、状态指示灯1005以及通信模块1002。其中,存储器1008、开关管10013、微动开关1007、状态指示灯1005、电源管理模块1004均可与CPU 10010进行直接的通信连接,电源管理模块1004可提供对电池1001电量的监控以及充电过程的管理;CPU 10010可控制开关管10013打开,以使电池1001能够通过配件接口向配件4充电。
继续参照图29,在该实施例中,通信模块1002采用超声载波通信硬件,该超声载波通信硬件可以包括数模转换器10023、压控振荡器10024以及超声波发生器10025。其中,数模转换器10023,可用于将CPU 10010中的数字信号转换为模拟信号,压控振荡器10024用于将模拟信号调制到超声波范围,通常为>18KHz的震荡信号;超声波发生器10025可用于将该调制信号向外发射。
人耳可听到的范围大约在20Hz-20KHz之间,但这个范围因人而异,且与声音的声强等级相关。通常情况下,在20KHz附近,有较小的声强范围可被人耳听到。另外,参照图30,随着年龄增长,人耳的听力也会产生频率损失,大部分成年人在20KHz附近的听觉已经产生较大的损失,而无法听到该频率的声音。
参照图31,图31为本申请一种实施例的无线音频设备2组件的结构示意图。在该实施例中,通信模块通过超声波将信号调制后向外发射,以实现单工通信。而由于通常麦克风2002接收到的声波频率范围稍大于人耳的听觉范围,故含有麦克风2002的终端设备(例 如无线音频设备)均可接收到该经超声波调制后的信号。
在一种可能的实施例中,收纳盒1端的CPU 10010将待发送的信号调制到超声频段,并选择18KHz-20KHz的频率范围作为载波频率,其中,超声波的频率随着传输信号幅度的变化而变化。而接收端的无线音频设备或其它终端设备通常具有44.1KHz或者48KHz的采样率,采样20KHz最高频的超声波信号满足奈奎斯特采样定律。之后,可经过接收端软件的滤波和信号处理,完成解调,解析出传输的数据。
由于无线音频设备组件可随身携带,这就很难避免无线音频设备组件,尤其是收纳盒1与其它结构之间发生碰撞或者摩擦,从而造成无线音频设备组件的磨损。针对此,本申请提供的无线音频设备组件还可以包括保护壳5。参照图32,图32展示了本申请一种实施例提供的保护壳5的结构。该保护壳5可以包括第一套体51和第二套体52,其中,第一套体51可套设于收纳盒1的本体11,第二套体52可套设于盒盖12。在本申请中,该保护壳5的材质可以但不限于为塑胶或者硅胶等,以在使保护壳5对收纳盒1和配件4起到保护作用的同时,便于使保护壳5与收纳盒1的外轮廓相贴合,从而可避免保护壳5从收纳盒1上脱落。
在本申请一些实施例中,还可以在保护壳5与收纳盒1的对应位置处分别设置磁铁,以通过磁铁之间的吸附作用来提高二者之间连接的可靠性。保护壳5与收纳盒1内的磁铁数量及位置可根据其空间进行具体设置。另外,保护壳5与收纳盒1内磁铁的形状可为圆形、方形、扇形等规则形状,也可以为非规则的形状,且保护壳5与收纳盒1内磁铁的形状可以相同也可以不同。
继续参照图32,第一套体51还可以设置有卡接槽511,上述实施例中的配件4的检测部41可与该卡接槽511相卡接,从而可通过该卡接槽511对安装于收纳盒1的配件4进行限位,以提高配件4与收纳盒1连接的可靠性。
一并参照图32和图33,在本申请一些实施例中,还可以在保护壳5的第一套体51中设置功能模块(图中未示出),并在第一套体51上设置连接接口512,功能模块可通过连接接口512与收纳盒通信连接。其中,第一套体51中可以但不限于集成有音乐播放控制按键、LED灯、红外信号遥控器,以及温度传感器、振动传感器、心电图传感器等传感功能模块。这样,保护壳5在对收纳盒1起到保护作用的同时,还可作为一个配件进行使用,其在成本上不与收纳盒1绑定,灵活可控。
参照图32和图33,在该实施例中,由于第一套体51可通过该连接接口512与收纳盒1的本体11进行通信连接,则在保护壳5内也无需安装独立的电池,其可有效的降低保护壳5的成本,并满足其小型化、轻薄化的设计要求。其中,第一套体51与本体11之间的通信连接,可参照上述任一实施例的配件4与收纳盒1之间的通信连接进行设置,在此不进行赘述。
在一个可能的实施例中,可参照图33,第一套体51的连接接口512可设置于第一套体51的腔体内,这样可实现连接接口512在外部不可见,以使保护壳5与收纳盒1在不影响无线音频设备组件和保护壳5的外观美观性的基础上,进行隐藏式的连接。连接接口512的具体结构可参照上述实施例的配件的安装部进行设置,在此不进行赘述。这样,连接接口512还可以与收纳盒1的本体11的第二槽位插接,来实现第一套体51与收纳盒1之间的通信连接。从而使第二槽位能够作为一个通用的接口,其既可与配件4适配,也可与第一套体51的连接接口512适配,以有效的简化收纳盒1的结构。另外,连接接口512 可采用柔性材料制成,这样可使连接接口512能够向第一套体51外侧进行弯折,从而便于该连接接口512与收纳盒1的本体11的连接。可以理解的是,在该实施例中,设置于连接接口512处的电路板可以为柔性电路板(flexible printed circuit,FPC),以有效的提高电路板结构的可靠性。
在一些实施例中,第一套体51内还可设置线圈,由于在上述实施例中介绍可知收纳盒1的本体1内也可以设置线圈,这样可使第一套体51通过其自身线圈对收纳盒1的本体11进行充电并实现通信;也可使收纳盒1的本体11通过其自身线圈对第一套体51进行充电并实现通信,从而使第一套体51和收纳盒1的本体11之间通过线圈实现双向的充电和通信。
本申请实施例在对无线音频设备的收纳盒进行上述硬件改进的基础上,基于改进之后的无线音频设备组件(具体可包括:收纳盒、无线音频设备以及配件)对收纳盒、配件以及无线音频设备之间的通信方法进行介绍。
应理解,本申请实施例中的配件指的是通过集成至少一个传感器为了实现某些功能的便携式设备,例如通过集成心率传感器为了实现心率的检测的配件。
以下介绍收纳盒的硬件结构。
如图34所示,收纳盒100可以包括处理器110,存储器120,通信模块130,充电管理模块140,电源管理模块141,电池142,传感器模块150,无线音频设备接口160,配件接口170,按键180,指示器181,微动开关182,显示屏190。
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。其中,控制器可以是收纳盒100的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。
存储器120可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在存储器120的指令,从而执行收纳盒100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。存储器120可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,以及至少一个应用程序(例如爱奇艺应用,微信应用等)的软件代码等。存储数据区可存储收纳盒100使用过程中所产生的数据(例如图像、视频等)等。此外,存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。
通信模块130可以提供应用在收纳盒100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),超声载波通信模块等无线通信的解决方案。通信模块130可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入,为处理器110,存储器120和通信模块130等供电。
传感器模块150可包括触摸传感器等。其中,触摸传感器151,也称“触控面板”。触摸传感器可以设置于显示屏190,由触摸传感器151与显示屏190组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器151用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏190提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中,触摸传感器151也可以设置于收纳盒100的表面,与显示屏190所处的位置不同。
无线音频设备接口160可包括两个接口,用于连接两个无线音频设备,比如连接两个耳机。
配件接口170用于连接所需要的配件,比如用于检测心率的配件,用于测量血压的配件等。
配对按键180用于将无线音频设备与外部终端设备进行配对,或者将配件与收纳盒进行配对等。配对按键180可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。收纳盒100可以接收按键输入,产生与收纳盒100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。
指示器181可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,通知等。
微动开关182用于使配件和收纳盒100进行配对连接。
显示屏190用于显示电池的电量信息等。显示屏190包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode的,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。在一些实施例中,收纳盒100可以包括1个或N个显示屏190,N为大于1的正整数。
可以理解的是,图34所示的部件并不构成对收纳盒的具体限定,收纳盒还可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。以下的实施例中,以图34所示的收纳盒100为例进行介绍。
如图35所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种应用场景示意图。参阅图35所示,该应用场景中可包括无线音频设备组件21和终端设备22。其中,无线音频设备组件21可包括收纳盒211、无线音频设备212,配件213。
在图35所示示意图中,无线音频设备组件21可以通过通信网络与终端设备22建立通信连接。示例性的,该通信网络可以是局域网,比如可以是Wi-Fi热点网络、无线保真点对点(wireless fidelity-peer to peer,Wi-Fi P2P)网络、蓝牙网络、zigbee网络或NFC网络等。作为一种可能的实现方式,该多个设备之间还可以是基于移动网络建立无线连接,例如该移动网络包括基于2G,3G,4G,5G以及后续的标准协议建立的移动网络。作为一种可能的实现方式,该多个设备还可以通过移动网络与至少一个服务器建立连接,各个设备之间通过服务器传输数据,和/或,消息,和/或,信息,和/或,信令,和/或,指令。作为一种可能的实现方式,该多个设备还可以通过数据线进行连接。
通过图34、图35的介绍可知,本申请实施例中涉及到的无线音频设备组件为包括无 线音频设备和配件的收纳装置。基于此,该无线音频设备组件具体可包括无线音频设备工作模式、无线音频设备配对模式、配件配对模式以及配件工作模式这四种工作模式。
应理解,本申请实施例中的工作模式可以包括但不限于上述四种模式,也可以为其他的工作模式,本申请对此不作具体限定。
参阅图36所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种工作模式之间的转换示意图。如图3所示,可以通过配对按键来触发无线音频设备处于无线音频设备配对模式或者触发配件处于配件工作模式;可以通过微动开关来触发配件处于配件配对模式。以下对上述四种工作模式进行详细介绍。
需要说明的是,通过微动开关来触发配件处于配件配对模式的方式仅是一种示意性说明,本申请实施例中也可以通过其它的方式来触发,对此不作具体限定。
第一种工作模式:无线音频设备工作模式
应理解,无线音频设备工作模式可以为无线音频设备在大多数时间内所处的工作模式。在该模式下,收纳盒主要为无线音频设备进行充电。
第二种工作模式:无线音频设备配对模式
应理解,该模式可以理解为无线音频设备与外部终端设备进行配对连接时所处的工作模式。示例性的,用户可长按收纳盒上的配对按钮,然后当该配对按钮的指示灯颜色发生变化时,此时外部终端设备可通过蓝牙搜索到该无线音频设备,然后通过配对码和该无线音频设备进行配对。应理解,用户长按配对按钮预设时长(比如,2秒)之后,指示灯颜色可发生变化。
第三种工作模式:配件配对模式
应理解,该模式可以理解为配件与收纳盒进行配对连接时所处的工作模式。
如图37A所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种配件与收纳盒进行配对的用户界面示意图。作为一种可能的实现方式,若配件上没有蓝牙模块,当用户打开收纳盒的盒盖时,外部终端设备(比如,手机)可通过蓝牙发现该收纳盒,此时手机上可显示图37A所示的用户界面40。随着收纳盒盒盖打开角度的增大,可触发微动开关,此时可以将配件连接到收纳盒,例如可显示用户界面41。其中,用户界面41中可显示该连接有配件的收纳盒的形态。当配件与收纳盒连接完成之后,手机上可显示用户界面42。该用户界面42中可包括提示框421,该提示框421可以包括收纳盒所连接的设备的电量信息422、连接成功的提示信息423等。当然,用户界面42中还可以显示配件、无线音频设备以及收纳盒等,并且,可显示配件的实际形态、无线音频设备的实际形态以及收纳盒的实际形态,本申请对此不作限定。
应理解,配件连接到收纳盒可以理解为配件与收纳盒建立物理连接以及通信连接。
作为又一种可能的实现方式,当配件上有蓝牙模块时,也可以通过蓝牙将配件与收纳盒进行配对连接。示例性的,当用户打开收纳盒的盒盖,并且随着收纳盒盒盖打开角度的增大,可触发微动开关,此时用户界面可由用户界面40切换到用户界面43。其中,用户界面43中可显示提示框431,该提示框431中可显示“连接”按钮432、“取消”按钮433。另外,还可以显示该连接有配件的收纳盒的形态。然后用户可点击“连接”按钮432,手机可响应用户的点击操作,并当用户将配件连接到无线音频设备的收纳盒时,手机上可显示用户界面44,该用户界面44中可包括提示框441,该提示框441中可包括配件442、无线音频设备443、收纳盒444以及提示信息445。其中,提示信息445可以为“正在连接…”。
其中,用户界面42中的虚线框仅是为了示意说明,在实际产品实现时可以不显示。应理解,图37A所示界面仅是一种示意性说明,在实际产品实现时,界面上显示的内容也可以比上述示意图中更多或更少的内容,例如还可以显示配件的具体功能、操作方式等,本申请对此不作限定。
需要说明的是,配件配对模式是在无线音频设备配对模式的基础上进行的,即在将配件与收纳盒进行配对之前,无线音频设备需要与外部终端设备完成配对。当配件上有蓝牙模块时,在将配件与收纳盒进行配对之前,配件需要与外部终端设备完成配对。
第四种工作模式:配件工作模式
本申请实施例中,当配件与收纳盒配对完成之后,用户可以通过操作收纳盒上的配对按钮控制配件进入配件工作模式。示例性的,用户可以双击配对按钮,然后收纳盒上的指示灯闪烁表示进入配件工作模式。
需要说明的是,配件工作模式下的指示灯闪烁时也可以以一定频率,例如记为第二频率(比如,1次/1S)的频次进行闪烁。也就是说,在配件配对模式下指示灯的闪烁频率与在配件工作模式下指示灯的闪烁频率不同。当然,可以理解的是,在配件配对模式下指示灯的闪烁颜色也可以与配件工作模式下的指示灯的闪烁颜色不同,本申请对此不作限定。
如图37B所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种配件与收纳盒进行配对的方法流程图,参阅图37B所示,该方法可包括如下步骤:
S401:收纳盒检测微动开关是否被触发。若微动开关被触发,则继续执行步骤S402。
以耳机盒为例,当用户将耳机盒的盒盖旋转到一定角度(比如,角度大于90度)时,可触发微动开关。需要说明的是,在将配件连接到收纳盒或者将配件从收纳盒中取出时均会触发微动开关。
S402:收纳盒对配件进行充电,以使配件能够正常工作。
本申请实施例中,当微动开关被触发之后,配件可以连接到收纳盒,然后收纳盒可打开充电控制的开关,使电流能够从连接接口流向配件,这样可对配件进行充电,以保证配件能够正常工作。应理解,配件与收纳盒进行首次配对时,配件上没有电量,此时可对配件进行充电,例如可对配件充电T1时长,然后在T1时长后关闭充电控制的开关。当然,当配件连接到收纳盒之后,收纳盒也可以一直对配件进行充电,直至配件的电量为100%可停止充电,本申请对此不作限定。
需要说明的是,当配件连接到收纳盒,微动开关被触发之后,收纳盒上的指示灯可以以一定频率,例如第一频率(比如,1次/2S)进行闪烁,以表示配件与收纳盒进入了配对流程。
需要说明的是,充电时长T1的取值可取决于无线音频设备组件查找配件的类型的时间长短。例如,配件在进入配件工作模式之后,可查找该配件的类型,即该配件的编码,如果查找配件的编码时间为t1,则对配件进行充电的时长可以参考查找配件的编码的时间。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中并不限定t1与T1的关系,例如当查找配件的编码时间t1比较短时,则对配件进行充电的时长T1可以等于t1,当然,T1也可以大于t1。
S403:收纳盒检测是否能接收到配件数据。若能接收到配件数据,则继续执行S404。
其中,配件数据可包括配件的编码、配件的类型、配件的固件版本信息、配件的状态信息(是否异常)、配件的生产时间等。应理解,在该实施例中收纳盒与配件之间可以通过收纳盒内部电触点之间的连接线来传输数据。
在一种可能的实现中,为了检测收纳盒与配件之间是否能正常通信,收纳盒可以向配件发送消息,若配件能够接收到该消息,并且可以向收纳盒反馈相应的消息,则说明收纳盒与配件之间可以正常通信。示例性的,收纳盒可向配件发送读取配件编码的指令。相应的,配件接收到该读取指令之后,可向收纳盒反馈配件的编码。
应理解,在本申请中当收纳盒与配件进行首次配对之后,收纳盒可将可以保存配件数据,即将配件与收纳盒的配对信息进行保存。需要说明的是,在该过程中,收纳盒的指示灯可以一直闪烁,直到收纳盒存储完配件数据之后,可熄灭指示灯。
若S403中收纳盒没有接收到配件数据,则可说明配件故障或者配件没有连接收纳盒等,此时收纳盒的指示灯可闪烁红灯,然后在T2时长之后熄灭指示灯。即在没有接收到配件数据,指示灯闪烁红灯时,可说明收纳盒与配件配对失败。
作为一种可能的实现方式,考虑到配件的形态多种多样,有可能有多个配件的外观看起来比较类似,这样用户有可能分不清楚配件是否已经与收纳盒进行配对,或者配件是否发生故障等其它问题,可以先对收纳盒上插入的配件进行校验。具体而言,可以通过检测收纳盒接收到的配件数据是否与存储的配件数据一致来确定该配件与收纳盒是否进行过配对,或者确定该配件是否能正常工作。
在一些实施例中,收纳盒可以将读取到的配件数据与存储的配对信息中的配件数据进行比较,判断读取到的配件数据是否与存储的配对信息中配件数据相同。如果读取到的配件数据与存储的配件数据相同,则说明该配件与无线音频设备的收纳盒配对过,并且该配件能够正常工作。如果读取到的配件数据与存储的配件数据不同,则说明配件发生故障,此时可以将已配对的状态重置为未配对状态。
应理解,如果收纳盒没有读取到配件数据或者接收到的配件数据与存储的配件数据不同,此时收纳盒的指示灯可闪烁红灯,例如可闪烁T2时长,并在T2时长之后熄灭指示灯。
S404:收纳盒接收到第一操作,所述第一操作用于触发配件进入配件工作模式。
其中,第一操作可以是:双击配对按钮、三连击配对按钮、轻按加长按配对按钮等,本申请对此不作具体限定。
S405:收纳盒响应第一操作,使配件进入配件工作模式。
S406:收纳盒接收配件的检测数据。
本申请实施例中,当收纳盒接收到配件发送的配件的检测数据之后,可将配件的检测数据发送给无线音频设备或者外部终端设备。具体的数据传输过程将在下文详细介绍,此处先不做赘述。
当然,图37B所示实施例仅是以一种配件为例进行的介绍,其它配件与收纳盒进行配对的方法可参阅图37B所示实施例的方法,此处不作过多赘述。
由于配件能够与收纳盒进行配对,无线音频设备又可以与外部终端设备进行配对,因此,配件的检测数据可以先传输给收纳盒,然后收纳盒再将配件的检测数据传输给终端设备或者无线音频设备。如图38A所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种无线音频设备与终端设备通信的示意图。
具体来说,无线音频设备与终端设备通信的方式可包括如下两种方式:
第一种:无线音频设备与终端设备分别建立连接,同步传输数据。无线音频设备以耳机为例,例如图38A中的(a)所示,两个耳机可以与手机通过蓝牙建立连接,然后同时通过蓝牙与手机之间传输数据。
第二种方式:一个无线音频设备同时与终端设备和另一个无线音频设备建立连接。例如图38A中的(b)所示,其中,耳机1与手机通过蓝牙建立连接,然后耳机1再与耳机2建立蓝牙连接。
需要说明的是,在图38A中的(a)所示示意图中,一个耳机与终端设备之间传输一个声道的数据,比如耳机1与终端设备之间传输左声道数据,那么耳机2与终端设备之间传输右声道数据。在图38A中的(b)所示示意图中,两个耳机之间传输单声道数据,与终端设备相连接的耳机,比如耳机1与终端设备之间传输双声道数据。
应理解,图38A所示示意图中仅是以蓝牙为例,在实际应用中,还可以通过其它的通信方式,比如近场磁感应通信(near field magnetic induction,NFMI)。另外,图38A中的L表示左声道数据,R表示右声道数据。
那么,在上述通信方式的基础上,如果要将配件的检测数据传输给无线音频设备或者终端设备,则需要与收纳盒建立通信连接,将配件的检测数据通过收纳盒传输给无线音频设备,或者通过无线音频设备再传输给终端设备。
在本申请实施例中,在配件进入配件工作模式之后,配件的检测数据可以通过如下几种方式获取:
第一种方式:可以通过触发微动开关,将配件从收纳盒上取出,然后在配件离线状态下使用配件,得到配件的检测数据。接着,在使用完配件得到配件的检测数据之后,再将配件连接到收纳盒上,进而将配件的检测数据发送给收纳盒。
第二种方式:无需将配件从收纳盒上取下来,直接通过带有配件的收纳盒来使用配件,得到配件的检测数据,进而将配件的检测数据发送给收纳盒。
以下结合不同场景对配件检测数据的传输过程进行介绍。
场景1:收纳盒上没有蓝牙通信模块。
在一种可能的实现方式中,若有一个无线音频设备放置在收纳盒内,另一个无线音频设备由用户佩戴,则配件的检测数据可以先发送给已经与配件配对连接的收纳盒,然后收纳盒再将配件的检测数据传输给放置在收纳盒内的无线音频设备,最后放置在收纳盒内的无线音频设备再将配件的检测数据传输给在的收纳盒外的另一个无线音频设备。示例性的,如图38B所示,假设耳机1放在收纳盒内,耳机2由用户佩戴。配件的检测数据可通过收纳盒发送给耳机1,然后耳机1再将配件的检测数据通过蓝牙传输给耳机2。
如图38C所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种配件检测数据的传输方法流程图,参阅图38C所示,该方法可包括如下步骤:
需要说明的是,图38C所示实施例为收纳盒接收到配件检测数据之后,将配件检测数据传输给无线音频设备的过程。
S501:收纳盒判断是否有一个无线音频设备在收纳盒内。若有一个无线音频设备在收纳盒内,则继续执行S502。
需要说明的是,如果无线音频设备不在收纳盒内,则此时收纳盒的指示灯可闪烁红灯,比如可闪烁T2时长。
S502:收纳盒将配件的检测数据发送给收纳盒内的无线音频设备。
S503:收纳盒内的无线音频设备将配件的检测数据发送给收纳盒外的无线音频设备。
如果有一只耳机在收纳盒内,则收纳盒将配件的检测数据发送给收纳盒内的耳机,然后收纳盒内的耳机再将配件的检测数据发送给收纳盒外的耳机,这样用户可通过佩戴的耳 机接收配件的检测数据。示例性的,配件的检测数据可以通过语音播报的方式在收纳盒外的耳机上播放。应理解,配件的检测数据可以包括数字(比如,测量温度得到的体温36.7摄氏度)、声音(比如,心跳声)等。
值的注意的是,无线音频设备接收到配件的检测数据之后,可以将配件的检测数据转换为用户可以听到的音频信号。或者,无线音频设备在接收到配件的检测数据之后,可以将配件的检测数据发送给外部终端设备,比如手机,然后由手机将配件的检测数据转换为音频信号,最后手机再将音频信号传递给无线音频设备。
需要说明的是,无线音频设备的主副之分由无线音频设备进行协商确定。在本申请实施例中,如果无线音频设备没有连接外部终端设备,则在收纳盒内的耳机可以为主耳机,在收纳盒外的耳机可以为副耳机,当然,在这种情况下,收纳盒内的耳机也可以为副耳机,在收纳盒外的耳机可以为主耳机。
如果无线音频设备连接了外部终端设备,则在收纳盒内的耳机为主耳机,在收纳盒外的耳机为副耳机。
在一种可能的实现中,在S501执行之后,收纳盒可以判断主副无线音频设备之间是否能正常通信,如果主副无线音频设备之间不能正常通信,则无线音频设备组件的指示灯可闪烁红灯,比如可闪烁T2时长。
当然,图38C所示实施例仅是一种示意,本申请实施例在另一种可能的实现方式中,若至少一个无线音频设备放置在收纳盒内,则配件的检测数据可以先发送给已经与配件配对连接的收纳盒,然后收纳盒再将配件的检测数据传输给放置在收纳盒内的无线音频设备,最后由无线音频设备将配件的检测数据发送给已经与无线音频设备配对连接的终端设备。
示例性的,如图38D所示,在图38D中的(a)所示示意图中,位于收纳盒内的耳机1与手机之间可以通过蓝牙通信,同时耳机1可以与耳机2通过单声道传输数据。在图38D中的(b)所示示意图中,位于收纳盒内的耳机1可以与手机之间通过单声道,比如左声道传输数据,位于收纳盒外的耳机2可以与手机之间通过单声道,比如右声道传输数据。
也就是说,在场景1所示实施例中,至少要有一个无线音频设备放置在收纳盒内,才能将配件的检测数据传输给无线音频设备或终端设备。这种方式虽然节省了硬件成本,与此同时也限制了无线音频设备的使用,使得用户体验不佳。
场景2:收纳盒上有蓝牙通信模块。
针对这种场景,本申请实施例中可以通过收纳盒上的通信模块,例如蓝牙模块将配件的检测数据传输给外部终端设备。当收纳盒上有蓝牙通信模块时,两个无线音频设备均可以放置在收纳盒外,或者有一个无线音频设备放置在收纳盒内,另一个无线音频设备放置在收纳盒外(可以由用户佩戴)。
以下以两个无线音频设备均放置在收纳盒外为例,介绍配件的检测数据的传输过程。
示例性的,假设两个耳机都在收纳盒外,如图39A所示,当无线音频设备处于无线音频设备工作模式时,收纳盒上的蓝牙模块可以处于关闭状态,以节约功耗,达到省电的效果。例如图39A中的(a)所示,两个耳机之间通过蓝牙建立连接,并传输单声道数据;主耳机与手机之间通过蓝牙建立通信连接,并且传输双声道数据。
作为一种可能的实现方式,如果要将配件的检测数据传输到手机,则可以将收纳盒上的蓝牙模块与副耳机之间建立通信连接,这样配件的检测数据就可以通过收纳盒与副耳机之间的蓝牙通信链路传输给副耳机。示例性的,如图39A中的(b)所示,当副耳机接收 到配件的检测数据之后,可通过双声道中的一路声道将配件的检测数据传输给主耳机,进而主耳机再将配件的检测数据传输给手机。
举例来说,如果用户佩戴耳机在听音乐,此时用户触发配对按钮使配件进入配件工作模式时,可以通过双声道中的一路声道传输配件的检测数据,另一路声道传输音乐的音频数据,这样用户就可以通过耳机听到配件的检测数据。应理解,本申请实施例中的数据并不限于为声音信号,例如在该场景下传输的数据可以为配件数据,具体可以为配件的检测数据。
需要说明的是,如果在无线音频设备工作模式下,用户想要使用配件,此时当用户触发配对按钮使配件进入配件工作模式时,可以同时将收纳盒上的蓝牙模块开启,以保证收纳盒可以通过蓝牙链路与无线音频设备进行通信。
作为另一种可能的实现方式,收纳盒可以直接与终端设备通过蓝牙建立连接,然后收纳盒通过蓝牙链路将配件的检测数据传输给终端设备。示例性的,如图39B所示,收纳盒可将配件的检测数据通过蓝牙传输给手机,两个耳机均与手机建立连接,同步传输数据。
进一步的,在一种可能的实现方式中,当收纳盒上的通信模块(具体可以为蓝牙模块)可以与终端设备建立连接时,可以在配件上集成控制按键,然后通过配件上的控制按键来控制智能家居等设备。具体来说,终端设备与收纳盒之间通过蓝牙建立连接,然后终端设备与智能家居之间可以通过无线局域网WLAN网络等建立连接。用户可以操作配件上的控制按键,配件可根据用户操作生成相应的控制指令,然后配件可将控制指令发送给收纳盒,收纳盒再将控制指令发送给终端设备,最后终端设备再将控制指令发送给智能家居。
相应的,当智能家居接收到控制指令之后,可根据控制指令执行与控制指令对应的操作,这样可以实现通过配件来控制智能家居,相比于现有技术中在终端设备的操作界面上控制智能家居的方法更为方便。
举例来说,如图40A所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种应用场景示意图。参阅图40A所示,收纳盒上安装有配件,配件上可包括多个控制按键,收纳盒与终端设备(比如,平板电脑、手机、智能电视)通过蓝牙建立连接,然后平板电脑、手机、智能电视可以与智能家居(比如,智能窗帘、路由器、智能音箱、智能电锅)通过Wi-Fi建立连接。示例性的,智能音箱在播放音乐,用户可通过配件上的“+”、“-”按键来控制智能音箱的音量。比如用户点击了配件上的“+”按键,然后配件生成控制指令,该控制指令用于将智能音箱的音量增大,然后配件将该控制指令发送给收纳盒。收纳盒接收到该控制指令之后,将该控制指令发送给手机,手机再将该控制指令发送给智能音箱。当智能音箱接收到该控制指令之后,可根据控制指令将智能音箱当前所播放的音乐的音量增大。
应理解,图40A所示示意图中的终端设备、智能家居仅是一种示例,本申请对此不作限定。
在另一种可能的实现方式中,可以在配件上集成至少一种用于健康测量的传感器(以下简称:健康参数传感器),比如可包括用于听诊的传感器、心率传感器、压力脉搏传感器、人体温度传感器、心电图传感器等。
以听诊为例,示例性的,如图40B所示,图40B中的(a)、(b)所示示意图分别为收纳盒上连接有配件的左视图和主视图。图40B中的(c)所示示意图为用于听诊的配件的结构示意图。其中,压电传感器为用于实现听诊功能的传感器,在压电传感器上下部分所 填充的隔音材料是为了降低配件外壳引入的噪声,在支撑结构和印制线路板之间填充隔音材料是为了减弱支撑结构接触听诊目标表面时,从支撑结构底部反向传输到压电传感器所产生的噪声。
如图40C所示,为用户通过收纳盒进行听诊的示意图。图40C所示示意图中的收纳盒上可连接有具有听诊功能的配件,用户可将该收纳盒放置在胸口,然后配件可采集用户的身体所发出的声音信号,比如心跳声、呼吸声等,并将采集到的声音信号传输给收纳盒。收纳盒接收到该声音信号之后,可通过收纳盒的处理器对该声音信号进行滤波降噪处理。接着,收纳盒再将处理后的声音信号传输给耳机,由耳机将听诊音频播放出来。
在又一种可能的实现方式中,还可以在配件上集成其它的传感器,比如记为辅助传感器,该辅助传感器可用于辅助健康测量。示例性的,该辅助传感器可以包括传感器:加速度传感器、陀螺仪传感器、光电接近传感器、振动传感器等。当然,配件上还可以集成其它的传感器,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。应理解,上述辅助传感器还可以集成在收纳盒上,本申请对此不作限定。
如图40D所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种利用配件进行健康测量的流程示意图。在图40D所示示意图中,辅助传感器可采集辅助传感数据,然后进行信号有效性判断,以判断用户的操作是否正确合理。当用户操作不正确时,收纳盒的处理器可调用语音库,然后根据采集到的辅助传感数据在预先存储的多条语音提示中选择出相应的语音提示,并将语音提示通过无线音频设备进行播放,以对用户进行操作测量指导。
示例性的,以陀螺仪传感器为例,比如用户通过收纳盒上的配件进行听诊,陀螺仪传感器可检测用户手持收纳盒的姿态是否稳定。具体的,陀螺仪传感器可将检测到的传感数据发送给收纳盒,然后收纳盒可根据陀螺仪传感器检测到的传感数据与预先存储的传感数据进行比较。若此次检测到的传感数据与预先存储的传感数据的差值在设定范围内,则可以认为用户手持收纳盒的姿态稳定;若此次检测到的传感数据与预先存储的传感数据的差值不在设定范围内,则可以认为用户手持收纳盒的姿态不稳定。
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,收纳盒中可以预先存储在用户操作正确的情况下辅助传感器的传感数据。
作为一种可能的实现方式,健康参数传感器可采集健康传感数据,然后通过诊断算法对健康传感数据进行诊断,得到诊断结果。此时,收纳盒的处理器可调用语音库,然后根据采集到的健康传感数据在预先存储的多条语音提示中选择出相应的语音提示(比如,此次心脏未显示异常),最后通过无线音频设备播放本次健康测量的测量结果。
作为另一种可能的实现方式,当收纳盒上有蓝牙通信模块时,收纳盒可以与外部终端设备通过蓝牙进行通信,此时收纳盒可以将从辅助传感器和/或健康传感器采集到的传感数据发送给外部终端设备,由外部终端设备通过诊断算法对传感数据进行诊断,得到诊断结果,然后再将诊断结果发送给无线音频设备,最后无线音频设备将诊断结果进行播报。
如图40E所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种健康测量的方法流程图,参阅图40E所示,该方法可包括如下步骤:
为了描述方便,以下可将“辅助传感数据”记为“第一数据”,将“健康传感数据”记为“第二数据”。
S701:收纳盒获取第一数据。
需要说明的是,S701执行之前,可执行图37B所示实施例的部分或全部方法步骤,例 如无线音频设备组件可进入配件工作模式,并且可对配件进行短时充电,以保证配件能够正常工作等。
S702:根据第一数据判断用户操作是否正确。若用户操作正确,可继续执行S703,若用户操作不正确,则向无线音频设备发送操作提示。
S703:收纳盒获取第二数据。
S704:对第二数据进行分析诊断,得到本次健康测量的测量结果。
在S704执行之后,收纳盒可将测量结果发送给无线音频设备(例如,用户佩戴的耳机),以便用户可以通过无线音频设备听到测量结果的播报。在该实施例中,可以利用辅助传感器检测测量姿势和位置的有效性,通过语音提示的方式帮助使用者使用正确的操作方式进行健康测量,最后通过语音播报测量结果,能够降低使用门槛,提升测量效率。
上述实施例均是以收纳盒100中的通信模块130为蓝牙模块为例进行的介绍。应理解,收纳盒100中的通信模块130还可以为超声载波模块。以下以通信模块为超声载波模块为例继续进行介绍。
如图41A所示,为本申请实施例提供的另一种收纳盒的结构示意图。参阅图41A所示,当通信模块为超声载波模块时,通信模块130具体可以包括数模转换器131,压控振荡器132,超声波发生器133。
其中,数模转换器用于将中央处理器中的数字信号转换为模拟信号,压控振荡器用于将模拟信号调制到超声波范围,超声波发声器用于将该调制信号向外发射。
需要说明的是,人耳可听到的声音范围大概在20Hz-20KHz之间,并且人耳的听力随着年龄的增大会产生频率损失(大部分成年人在20KHz左右的听觉已经产生较大的损失,无法听到该频率的声音)。因此,通常可将频率大于17KHz的声音称为超声波。
由于麦克风接收到的声波频率范围稍大于人耳的听觉范围,因此含有麦克风的设备均可以接收到超声载波模块发出的信号。在本申请实施例中,该超声载波模块通过超声波将信号调制后向外发射,以实现单工通信。以图31为例,两个耳机中均含有麦克风,因此,两个耳机能够接收到超声载波模块中的超声波发生器发出的信号。
在一些实施例中,超声载波模块可以先发送超声载波类别的帧头,以使外部接收设备进入相应的模式,然后再发送数据。示例性的,不同类别的帧头的信号可以参阅如图41B所示的示意图。例如,类别A可以为传输模拟音频信号,类别B可以为传输控制信号,类别C可以为传输搜寻信号。当然,这三种举例仅是一种示例,本申请对此不作具体限定。
相应的,接收设备(例如无线音频设备)在接收到帧头之后,可以通过类别识别模块对帧头进行识别,然后触发相应的数据解调处理过程。
如图41C所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输方法交互流程图,参阅图41C所示,该方法可包括如下步骤:
为了描述方便,以下可将两个无线音频设备记为“第一无线音频设备”和“第二无线音频设备”。应理解,收纳盒的超声载波模块向无线音频设备发送的数据可包括多种,比如与收纳盒的功能相关的数据(例如,收纳盒的电量信息)、配件的检测数据等。以下以收纳盒的超声载波模块向无线音频设备发送配件的检测数据为例进行说明。
S801:收纳盒的超声载波模块向第一无线音频设备和第二无线音频设备发送配件的检测数据。
需要说明的是,超声载波模块发出的信号为模拟信号,在本申请中为了区分模拟信号 的业务类型,作为一种可能的实现方式,在发送配件的检测数据之前,收纳盒的超声载波模块可以先发送指示信息,以指示发送的数据类型。
在一种可能的实现中,在第一无线音频设备和第二无线音频设备在接收到指示信息之后,第一无线音频设备和第二无线音频设备可以对接收到的指示信息进行识别。然后,第二无线音频设备可将接收到的指示信息发送给第一无线音频设备。相应的,第一无线音频设备可将自身接收到的指示信息与第二无线音频设备发送的指示信息进行相位匹配,以得到第一音频设备与第二音频设备之间的第一超声相位偏移。
在本申请实施例中,虽然第一无线音频设备和第二无线音频设备接收到的指示信息,例如超声载波的帧头相同,但由于第一无线音频设备和第二无线音频设备都有各自的时钟,因此,第一无线音频设备和第二无线音频设备接收到的超声载波的帧头的时间不同。换句话来说,两个无线音频设备接收到超声载波的帧头时存在时间差。示例性的,假设第二无线音频设备在t时刻接收到超声载波的帧头,并且两个无线音频设备之间的第一超声相位偏移为ΔT,那么第一无线音频设备已经接收到了t+ΔT时长。在一种可能的实现方式中,可以利用该时间差将两个通道的数据进行合并,以实现采样率等效加倍,即提高采样率。
S802:第一无线音频设备将自身接收到的第一检测数据与第二无线音频设备发送的第二检测数据进行相位匹配,得到第一音频设备与第二音频设备之间的超声相位偏移。
在本申请实施例中,收纳盒中的超声载波模块可向两个无线音频设备发送相同的数据,但是由于两个无线音频设备本身的硬件差异(比如,生产制作过程中导致的差异),使得两个无线音频设备接收到的数据不同。示例性的,假设指示信息对应的数据为第一数据,例如第一数据包括第一检测数据和第二检测数据,则第一无线音频设备接收到的数据可能为第一检测数据或者第二检测数据,第二无线音频设备接收到的数据可能为第二检测数据或者第一检测数据。
具体来说,第二无线音频设备可将接收到的第二检测数据发送给第一无线音频设备,然后第一无线音频设备可基于自身接收的第一检测数据与第二无线音频设备发送给的第二检测数据得到两个无线音频设备之间的相位偏移,例如可记为第二超声相位偏移。
应理解,为了保证超声相位偏移的准确性,无线音频设备在每次接收到数据之后,都可以计算两个无线音频设备之间的超声相位偏移。例如,在本申请中的第一超声相位偏移与第二超声相位偏移可能相同,也可能不同,本申请对此不作限定。
S803:第一无线音频设备根据超声相位偏移将第二音频设备发送的第一检测数据与自身接收到的第二检测数据进行融合,得到融合后的数据。
S804:第一无线音频设备对融合后的数据进行解调。
举例来说,假设收纳盒连接有具有听诊功能的配件,收纳盒的处理器采集到配件的检测数据之后,可首先控制超声载波模块发送超声载波类别的帧头,然后再通过超声载波通信将听诊音信号发送出去。接收端设备(耳机)检测到超声载波类别的帧头后进入信号解调处理步骤,将模拟信号转换为数字信号,最终再将数字信号转换为声音信号,使用户通过无线方式进行听诊。需要说明的是,超声载波模块发出的信号为模拟信号。
在本申请实施例中,通过对融合后的数据进行解调,可以得到更宽频带的信号。示例性的,通常人体心音的范围为0-200Hz,单通道麦克风方法下,可覆盖其频带范围。而人体肺音的范围为50Hz-1200Hz,高频部分主要对应肺部疾病状态下的异常肺音,而单通道麦克风采样无法覆盖到其高频部分。采用本实施例的双通道麦克风采样方案,可以实现对 肺音高频部分的采样,从而实现对相应肺部疾病的诊断。
在一些实施例中,可以通过帧头进行双通道数据对齐,以实现两个通道的数据融合,从而提高采样率。示例性的,如图41D所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种进行数据对齐的示意图。从图41D中可以看出,以主耳机时间为基准,副耳机数据与主耳机数据在相位上相差ΔT。
在数据对齐之后,可以将主耳机和副耳机的数据进行融合,即可将两个通道的数据融合为双倍采样率88.2KHz的数据。示例性的,如图41E所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种进行数据融合的示意图。
如图41F所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种数据解调处理方法示意图。具体来说,本申请实施例中的数据解调过程可包括:利用带通滤波器进行滤波、欠采样、过零点检测、利用低通滤波器进行滤波这四个过程。
具体而言,带通滤波器的通带可设置为与收纳盒发送频带的宽度相同,其具有频域抗混叠作用。然后采用小于Fs/2的频率对信号进行欠采样。其中,Fs/2为耳机上麦克风的采样率的二倍,即Fs对应单倍的麦克风采样率,通常为44.1KHz。欠采样使信号在频域进行了对称搬移,原来相对高频的信号成分搬移到了相对低频的位置。随后,可在耳机等终端内部对该低频信号进行过零点检测,即检测相邻两个采样点形成的连线是否穿越零电平。最后,再经过低通滤波器对原始信号进行滤波,得到解调后的信号。
示例性的,可以通过检测一定时间间隔(比如,Tx)内穿越零点的数量(比如,Nx)来推算信号对应的频率,即Fx=Tx/Nx。再根据收纳盒中压控震荡器的换算系数k和b,对应到原始信号的幅度Vx,即Vx=k*Fx+b。其中,k的单位是V/Hz,b的单位是V。如图41G所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种过零点检测的示意图。应理解,过零率=穿越零点的数量/时间间隔,并且,图41G中仅是以时间间隔为0.1s为例进行的说明。
应理解,欠采样是对已经采样到的数字信号重新再采一次样。欠采样的频率为原采样率的一半,对于现有技术通常为22.05KHz(因为现有技术中单通道的原采样率为44.1KHz);本申请实施例中由于等效采样率为88.2KHz,因此欠采样率为44.1KHz。
需要说明的是,对于其它具有多个麦克风的终端设备,也可以采用该实施例所提供的多通道麦克风融合的方法,以提高超声音频的带宽。
应理解,在麦克风采样率为44.1KHz时,由于受到人体听觉范围的限制和接收到设备采样率的限制,调制超声波的频带为18KHz-20KHz。通过本实施例中双通道信号融合方法,最多可实现22KHz-42KHz频带超声信号的解调,比单通道下的18KHz-20KHz带宽增大了10倍,其对应的时域原始信号的分辨率对应地提高了10倍。同时22KHz-42KHz可减少对儿童人群听觉的影响。
需要说明的是,由于在本申请实施例中进行了双通道的数据融合,即采样率为88.2KHz,因此,可以支持最高频44.1KHz(例如,可以取值为42KHz)的超声载波信号。如果保持下限18KHz不变,那么就变成了18KHz-42KHz的一个宽频带范围。另外,由于儿童能够听到18KHz-20KHz之间的声音,为了优化对儿童等听力阈值较高的群体的体验,可以将下限取值为22KHz。因此,本申请实施例中的频带范围可以为22KHz-42KHz,共20KHz的带宽,比原来2KHz(20KHz-18KHz=2KHz)的带宽增大了10倍。
如图41H所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种单通道与双通道的采样频带范围示意图。应理解,22KHz-42KHz仅是一种示例,欠采样导致频带搬移到第一奈奎斯特采样区(即 0-fs/2区间),高频变为:44.1KHz(为方便计算,以下记为44KHz)-22KHz=22KHz,低频:44KHz-42Hz=2KHz。如果选择24KHz-30KHz的超声波载波范围,则欠采样后的频谱搬移为高频:44KHz-24KHz=20KHz,低频:44KHz-30KHz=14KHz,即频带范围为:14KHz-20KHz。
在过零点检测步骤中,检测时间间隔Tx对应能够解调到信号的最大带宽。例如,单通道麦克风方法下,欠采样后频带为2KHz-4KHz,且不易扩大此带宽,否则对应的超声带宽超过18KHz-20KHz。此时,若过零点检测间隔Tx为2ms,对应信号的最高频为250Hz,即对于最低频2KHz的信号,可检测到4±1个过零点,若进一步减小Tx,则±1的计数误差影响会变大,不利于信号恢复。
在本申请实施例中,可选择将超声发送信号远离Fs/2,使接收端在欠采样后,信号最高频远离0点,例如发送24KHz-30KHz的超声波,对应欠采样后的最低频为14KHz,最高频为20KHz,则过零点检测间隔可小至0.4ms,对应还原的信号最高频为2500Hz。本实施例实现了更高带宽的原始信号传输。
对于现有技术的单通道场景,发送端超声载波为18KHz-20KHz,接收端采样率fs为44.1KHz,若欠采样率为fs/2,则通过欠采样使频谱对称搬移到<fs/4的第一奈奎斯特采样区中,高频22.05KHz-18KHz=4KHz,低频22.05KHz-20KHz=2KHz。因此,单通道场景下,经过欠采样后,信号变成了2KHz-4KHz的低频信号。
若要对此低频信号进行“过零点检测”,即对一定时间内信号穿过0信号轴的次数进行计数。通常最小的检测间隔为2ms,2ms对于2KHz的信号能够检测到8个点,对于4KHz能够检测到16个点。换句话来说,如果计数了8个点的话即认为是2KHz信号,如果计了16个点的话,则认为是4KHz信号。对于2KHz-4KHz之间的信号,由于有±1的计数误差,分辨率太低,只能计数8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15/16这九种数值,则分辨率为9种频率,对应发送端调制前是9种信号幅度,这种分辨率是最低的了。所以,实际应用中通常为20ms的过零点检测间隔,此时2KHz会检测到80个点,4KHz会检测到160个点。中间有81个可能的数值,对应发送端就有81个幅度分辨率。
但是,在增大过零点采样间隔的同时会使得能够解调恢复的信号带宽受限,例如前面设置为2ms过零点检测率,则对应2ms输出一个数值,则信号最高频率为250Hz;如果以20ms为过零点采样间隔,则20ms输出一个点的结果,对应信号最高频为25Hz。
在本申请实施例中,若发送端发送24KHz-30KHz的超声波,通过双通道融合等效采样率为88.2KHz,然后通过欠采样率44.1KHz进行欠采样,使频谱以22.05KHz进行镜像搬移到14KHz-20KHz。此时由于低频为14KHz,过零点检测间隔可以适当缩短,例如检测间隔设置为0.4ms,此时对于低频14KHz能够检测到约5个过零点。对于高频30KHz能够检测到12个过零点,这样5-12共有8个可能的值,对应发送端8段幅度分辨率,但是0.4ms对应信号最高频为1250Hz。
因此,通过本申请实施例的方案,可以提高超声载波通信所支持的发送端原始信号的最大带宽。另外,当过零点采样率设置得越高时可以增加发送端原始信号的幅度分辨率。
上述本申请提供的实施例中,从设备作为执行主体的角度对本申请实施例提供的方法进行了介绍。为了实现上述本申请实施例提供的方法中的各功能,设备可以包括硬件结构和/或软件模块,以硬件结构、软件模块、或硬件结构加软件模块的形式来实现上述各功能。上述各功能中的某个功能以硬件结构、软件模块、还是硬件结构加软件模块的方式来执行, 取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。
如图42所示,本申请另外一些实施例公开了一种通信装置。参阅图42所示,所述通信装置4200包括:一个或多个处理器4201;一个或多个存储器4202;通信接口4203,上述各器件可以通过一个或多个通信总线4204连接。
其中,存储器4202中存储有一个或多个计算机程序,所述一个或多个计算机程序包括指令;处理器4201调用存储器4202中存储的所述指令,使得通信装置4200可以上述实施例的通信方法。
通信接口4203,用于通过传输介质和其它设备进行通信。处理器4201可以利用通信接口4203收发数据。示例性的,该通信接口可以为配件接口或者音频设备接口等。
在本申请实施例中,处理器4201可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器、专用集成电路、现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件,可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于存储器4202中,处理器4201读取存储器4202中的程序指令,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
在本申请实施例中,存储器4202可以是非易失性存储器,比如硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD)等,还可以是易失性存储器(volatile memory),例如RAM。存储器还可以是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是电路或者其它任意能够实现存储功能的装置,用于存储指令和/或数据。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。
基于以上实施例,本申请还提供了一种计算机存储介质,所述计算机存储介质中存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被计算机执行时,使得所述计算机执行以上实施例提供的通信方法。
本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机程序产品,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行以上实施例提供的通信方法。
本申请实施例是参照根据本申请实施例的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器,使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。
这些计算机程序指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中,使得存储在该计算机可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品,该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上,使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理,从而在计算机或其他 可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。

Claims (50)

  1. 一种无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,包括收纳盒、无线音频设备和配件,其中:
    所述收纳盒,包括本体和盒盖,所述本体设置有第一槽位和第二槽位,所述第一槽位设置于所述收纳盒的第一表面,且可容置于所述盒盖与所述本体盖合形成的容置空间内;
    所述无线音频设备可插设于所述第一槽位,且与所述收纳盒通信连接;
    所述配件的至少部分暴露于所述收纳盒的外部,且所述配件可拆卸的插接于所述第二槽位,并与所述本体卡接固定;所述配件与所述收纳盒通信连接。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述配件包括相连接的检测部和安装部,所述检测部设置有传感器;所述安装部包括连接部和接触部,所述接触部通过所述连接部与所述检测部连接,且所述接触部可拆卸的插接于所述第二槽位。
  3. 如权利要求2所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述第一槽位与所述第二槽位设置于所述本体的不同表面;所述安装部位于所述检测部的朝向所述本体的一侧表面。
  4. 如权利要求3所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述收纳盒还包括传动机构,所述传动机构位于所述收纳盒的壳体内,所述传动机构包括连接臂、驱动部件和卡接部件,所述连接臂的一端与所述盒盖固定连接,所述驱动部件位于所述连接臂与所述卡接部件之间,所述卡接部件位于所述驱动部件的背离所述第一表面的一侧,且与所述驱动部件的端部相抵接;所述连接臂随所述盒盖转动,可带动所述驱动部件转动,所述驱动部件的转动方向与所述连接臂的转动方向相反;所述驱动部件可推动所述卡接部件向背离所述第一表面的方向滑动;
    所述安装部插接于所述第二槽位时,可与所述卡接部件相卡接。
  5. 如权利要求4所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述连接臂的另一端设置有第一抵接部;所述驱动部件的靠近所述连接臂的一端设置有第二抵接部,靠近所述卡接部件的一端设置有凸起,所述第二抵接部相对于所述第一抵接部靠近所述第一表面设置,所述凸起朝向背离所述第一表面的一侧凸出于所述驱动部件的表面;且所述卡接部件与所述凸起相抵接。
  6. 如权利要求4或5所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述第二槽位包括开设于所述壳体的开口,在所述壳体的内部还设置有滑槽,所述开口与所述滑槽连通;所述卡接部件可在所述滑槽内沿朝向或者背离所述第一表面的方向滑动。
  7. 如权利要求6所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述滑槽内设置有弹性件,所述弹性件位于所述卡接部件的背离所述第一表面的一侧,且所述弹性件与所述卡接部件弹性抵接。
  8. 如权利要求6或7所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述卡接部件开设有卡孔,所述卡孔为贯穿孔,且所述卡孔包括相连通的第一孔位和第二孔位,所述第一孔位相对于所述第二孔位靠近所述驱动部件设置;所述安装部可穿过所述第一孔位,并卡接于所述第二孔位。
  9. 如权利要求8所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述收纳盒还设置有插接底座,所述插接底座与卡接部件设置于所述驱动部件的同一侧;所述插接底座具有插接槽,且所述插接槽的槽口朝向所述卡接部件,所述第二槽位由所述开口、所述卡接部件的所述卡孔以及所述插接槽构成。
  10. 如权利要求9所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述插接槽内设置有多个触 点,所述接触部的背离所述检测部的表面设置有多个接触区,每个所述接触区可与一个所述触点对应接触并通信连接。
  11. 如权利要求9或10所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述盒盖具有第一转动位和第二转动位,在所述第二转动位时所述盒盖打开的角度,大于在所述第一转动位时所述盒盖打开的角度;
    所述盒盖处于所述第一转动位时,所述卡接部件的所述第二孔位与所述开口相对;所述盒盖处于所述第二转动位时,所述卡接部件的所述第一孔位与所述开口相对。
  12. 如权利要求11所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,当所述配件插接于所述收纳盒,且所述盒盖处于第一转动位时,所述接触部与所述检测部位于所述卡接部件的两侧,所述接触部在所述卡接部件上的投影的至少部分位于所述孔位的轮廓范围之外;
    当所述盒盖处于第二转动位时,插接于所述收纳盒的所述配件的所述接触部可穿过所述第一孔位和所述开口从所述第二槽位抽出;或,所述配件的所述接触部可穿过所述开口和所述第一孔位插设于所述插接槽。
  13. 如权利要求3所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述收纳盒还包括传动机构,所述传动机构位于所述收纳盒的壳体内,所述传动机构包括行程开关和剪刀脚结构,所述行程开关由开设于所述壳体的通孔露出;所述剪刀脚结构包括第一卡接脚和第二卡接脚,所述第一卡接脚和所述第二卡接脚相铰接,所述行程开关自所述通孔向所述壳体内运动可增大所述第一卡接脚和所述第二卡接脚之间的夹角;
    所述安装部插接于所述第二槽位时,可与所述第一卡接脚和所述第二卡接脚相卡接。
  14. 如权利要求13所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述壳体内部设置有开关盒,所述开关盒罩设于所述通孔;
    所述行程开关包括按压部、传动部和挤压部,所述按压部的至少部分容置于开关盒,且按压部的至少部分可伸入所述通孔;所述传动部自所述按压部向所述壳体的内部延伸,所述挤压部设置于所述按压部的背离所述安装部的一端,且所述挤压部可对所述第一卡接脚和所述第二卡接脚施加挤压力,以使所述第一卡接脚和所述第二卡接脚之间的夹角增大。
  15. 如权利要求14所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述第二槽位包括开设于所述壳体的开口,所述通孔与所述开口相对设置;所述收纳盒还设置有插接底座,所述插接底座具有插接槽,且所述插接槽的槽口朝向所述开口;
    所述第一卡接脚和所述第二卡接脚的部分穿入所述插接槽内,另一部分由所述插接底座的靠近所述行程开关的槽壁伸出至所述插接底座的外部,所述挤压部可容置于所述第一卡接脚和所述第二卡接脚的伸出至所述插接底座的外部的部分界定的区间内。
  16. 如权利要求15所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述第一卡接脚的穿入所述插接槽的部分的端部具有第一卡钩,所述第二卡接脚的穿入所述插接槽的部分的端部具有第二卡钩,所述第一卡勾和所述第二卡勾均向所述第一卡接脚和所述第二卡接脚界定的区域内弯折,所述接触部可与所述第一卡勾和所述第二卡勾卡接。
  17. 如权利要求16所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述第一卡接脚的穿入所述插接底座的部分和所述第二卡接脚的穿入所述插接底座的部分之间通过弹性件连接,所述弹性件处于拉伸状态。
  18. 如权利要求15~17任一项所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述插接底座的朝向所述行程开关的表面设置有限位部,当所述行程开关朝向所述剪刀脚结构运动至设定 行程距离时,所述挤压部与所述限位部相抵接。
  19. 如权利要求6~18任一项所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述连接部套设有密封圈,所述密封圈可与所述开口过盈配合。
  20. 如权利要求2所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述第一槽位与所述第二槽位设置于所述本体的同一表面,且所述第二槽位可容置于所述盒盖与所述本体盖合形成的容置空间内。
  21. 如权利要求20所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述连接部与所述检测部的一个端部连接,所述接触部自所述连接部向所述收纳盒一侧弯折;所述第二槽位的至少一个槽壁上设置有第一限位结构,所述接触部设置有第二限位部,所述第一限位部可与所述第二限位部一一对应限位卡接。
  22. 如权利要求21所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述第二槽位内设置有多个触点,所述接触部设置有多个接触区,每个所述接触区与一个所述触点接触并通信连接。
  23. 如权利要求20~22任一项所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述检测部设置有第一磁铁,所述第一磁铁设置于所述检测部的背离所述接触部的一端;所述收纳盒设置有第二磁铁,所述第一磁铁可与所述第二磁铁相吸附。
  24. 如权利要求1~23任一项所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述收纳盒设置有中央处理器、电池、第一开关管,所述中央处理器通过所述第一开关管控制所述电池与所述配件的导通状态;
    所述配件设置有超级电容、二极管和功能电路,所述超级电容存储的电量可通过所述二极管为所述功能电路供电。
  25. 如权利要求24所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述收纳盒还包括第一模拟开关,所述中央处理器可控制所述第一模拟开关与所述电池导通,并将所述第一模拟开关与所述电池形成的连接线路作为电源线为所述配件充电;
    在为配件充电设定时间后,所述中央处理器还用于断开所述第一模拟开关与所述电池之间的连接,所述第一模拟开关切换至与所述中央处理器的数字管脚导通的状态,以用于进行数据传输。
  26. 如权利要求25所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述配件还包括第二模拟开关,所述第二模拟开关用于与所述超级电容导通,并进行电量存储;
    所述超级电容的正极连接比较器,当所述比较器判断所述超级电容的电压超过设定值时,所述比较器控制所述第二模拟开关切换至与所述配件的数字管脚导通的状态,以进行数据发送和接收。
  27. 如权利要求24~26任一项所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述收纳盒还设置有配件触发开关,所述触发开关开启时,所述收纳盒对所述配件进行供电;当所述触发开关关闭时,所述收纳盒停止对所述配件的供电。
  28. 如权利要求24~27任一项所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述收纳盒还设置有通信模块,所述中央处理器可控制所述通信模块与所述无线音频设备、所述配件以及外部终端设备进行通信。
  29. 如权利要求28所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述通信模块包括蓝牙模块和天线;或所述通信模块包括数模转换模块、压控振荡器和超声波发生器。
  30. 如权利要求1~29任一项所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述无线音频设 备组件还包括保护壳,所述保护壳包括第一套体和第二套体,所述第一套体可套设于所述收纳盒的所述本体,所述第二套体可套设于所述收纳盒的盒盖。
  31. 如权利要求30所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述第一套体设置有功能模块和连接接口,所述功能模块通过所述连接接口与所述收纳盒通信连接。
  32. 如权利要求31所述的无线音频设备组件,其特征在于,所述连接接口可插接于所述第二槽位。
  33. 一种通信方法,应用于无线音频设备组件,所述无线音频设备组件包括收纳盒、无线音频设备以及配件,所述配件可拆卸的连接于所述收纳盒,所述配件包括用于健康监测的传感器,其特征在于,包括:
    所述收纳盒接收到用户对所述收纳盒上的配对按钮的第一操作;
    所述收纳盒响应所述第一操作,控制所述配件进入配件工作模式;
    所述收纳盒接收所述配件在所述配件工作模式下的检测数据。
  34. 如权利要求33所述的方法,其特征在于,所述收纳盒接收到用户对所述收纳盒上的配对按钮的第一操作之前,所述方法还包括:
    所述收纳盒与所述配件通过微动开关进行连接。
  35. 如权利要求33或34所述的方法,其特征在于,所述无线音频设备包括第一无线音频设备和第二无线音频设备;
    所述方法还包括:
    所述收纳盒将所述检测数据发送给所述第一无线音频设备;
    所述第一无线音频设备将所述检测数据发送给所述第二无线音频设备。
  36. 如权利要求35所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一无线音频设备和所述第二无线音频设备位于所述收纳盒外时,所述方法还包括:
    所述第二无线音频设备将所述检测数据发送给第一电子设备。
  37. 如权利要求33所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述收纳盒将所述检测数据发送给第一电子设备,所述第一电子设备为与所述收纳盒通过第一通信方式进行通信连接的电子设备。
  38. 如权利要求37所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述无线音频设备接收所述第一电子设备发送的检测数据。
  39. 如权利要求37或38所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一电子设备通过第二通信方式与第二电子设备进行通信连接;
    所述方法还包括:
    所述收纳盒接收用户的第二操作,所述第二操作为对所述收纳盒上的控制按键的触发操作;
    所述收纳盒根据所述第二操作生成与所述第二操作相对应的控制指令;
    所述收纳盒将所述控制指令发送给所述第一电子设备,以使所述第一电子设备将所述控制指令发送给所述第二电子设备。
  40. 如权利要求33-39任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述收纳盒接收所述配件在所述配件工作模式下的检测数据之前,所述方法还包括:
    所述收纳盒接收所述配件发送的辅助传感数据;
    所述收纳盒若根据所述辅助传感数据与预先存储的传感数据判断用户操作不正确,则 向所述无线音频设备发送语音提示信息。
  41. 如权利要求35所述的方法,其特征在于,所述无线音频设备包括第一无线音频设备和第二无线音频设备;
    当所述收纳盒上包括超声载波通信模块时,所述方法还包括:
    所述第一无线音频设备接收所述收纳盒上的超声载波通信模块发送的配件的第一检测数据;
    所述第一无线音频设备根据所述第一检测数据和第二检测数据确定所述第一无线音频设备和所述第二无线音频设备之间的超声相位偏移;其中,所述第二检测数据为所述第二无线音频设备接收到的所述收纳盒上的超声载波通信模块发送的配件的检测数据,所述第一检测数据和所述第二检测数据不同;
    所述第一无线音频设备根据所述超声相位偏移将所述第一检测数据与所述第二检测数据进行融合,得到融合之后的数据。
  42. 一种装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括收纳盒、无线音频设备和配件,其中,
    所述收纳盒,用于接收到用户对所述收纳盒上的配对按钮的第一操作;
    所述收纳盒,还用于响应所述第一操作,控制所述配件进入配件工作模式;
    所述收纳盒,还用于接收所述配件在所述配件工作模式下的检测数据。
  43. 如权利要求42所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收纳盒还用于:与所述配件通过微动开关进行连接。
  44. 如权利要求42所述的装置,其特征在于,所述无线音频设备包括第一无线音频设备和第二无线音频设备;
    所述收纳盒还用于:将所述检测数据发送给所述第一无线音频设备;
    所述第一无线音频设备,用于将所述检测数据发送给所述第二无线音频设备。
  45. 如权利要求44所述的装置,其特征在于,当所述第一无线音频设备和所述第二无线音频设备位于所述收纳盒外时,所述第二无线音频设备还用于:将所述检测数据发送给第一电子设备。
  46. 如权利要求42所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收纳盒还用于:将所述检测数据发送给第一电子设备,所述第一电子设备为与所述收纳盒通过第一通信方式进行通信连接的电子设备。
  47. 如权利要求46所述的装置,其特征在于,所述无线音频设备还用于:接收所述第一电子设备发送的检测数据。
  48. 如权利要求46或47所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一电子设备通过第二通信方式与第二电子设备进行通信连接;
    所述收纳盒还用于:接收用户的第二操作,所述第二操作为对所述收纳盒上的控制按键的触发操作;根据所述第二操作生成与所述第二操作相对应的控制指令,并将所述控制指令发送给所述第一电子设备,以使所述第一电子设备将所述控制指令发送给所述第二电子设备。
  49. 如权利要求42-48任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收纳盒还用于:接收所述配件发送的辅助传感数据;若根据所述辅助传感数据与预先存储的传感数据判断用户操作不正确,则向所述无线音频设备发送语音提示信息。
  50. 如权利要求42所述的装置,其特征在于,所述无线音频设备包括第一无线音频设 备和第二无线音频设备;
    当所述收纳盒上包括超声载波通信模块时,所述第一无线音频设备用于:接收所述收纳盒上的超声载波通信模块发送的配件的第一检测数据;并根据所述第一检测数据和第二检测数据确定所述第一无线音频设备和所述第二无线音频设备之间的超声相位偏移;其中,所述第二检测数据为所述第二无线音频设备接收到所述收纳盒上的超声载波通信模块发送的配件的检测数据,所述第一检测数据和所述第二检测数据不同;根据所述超声相位偏移将所述第一检测数据与所述第二检测数据进行融合,得到融合之后的数据。
PCT/CN2022/073001 2021-02-22 2022-01-20 一种无线音频设备组件、通信方法及装置 WO2022174716A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110198105 2021-02-22
CN202110198105.2 2021-02-22
CN202110351496.7 2021-03-31
CN202110351496.7A CN114979905B (zh) 2021-02-22 2021-03-31 一种无线音频设备组件、通信方法及装置

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022174716A1 true WO2022174716A1 (zh) 2022-08-25

Family

ID=82931191

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/073001 WO2022174716A1 (zh) 2021-02-22 2022-01-20 一种无线音频设备组件、通信方法及装置

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2022174716A1 (zh)

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN204231644U (zh) * 2014-12-15 2015-03-25 青岛歌尔声学科技有限公司 可对无线耳机收纳和充电的可穿戴电子设备
WO2018112689A1 (zh) * 2016-12-19 2018-06-28 华为技术有限公司 一种具有蓝牙耳机的可穿戴设备
US10244298B1 (en) * 2012-04-30 2019-03-26 Piearcings, Llc Wearable wireless audio device
CN109688504A (zh) * 2019-01-22 2019-04-26 歌尔科技有限公司 一种无线耳机的充电盒、健康监测方法和装置
CN209001947U (zh) * 2018-12-19 2019-06-18 邓富城 一种可穿戴智能语音助手装置
CN111736451A (zh) * 2019-03-25 2020-10-02 深圳傲智天下信息科技有限公司 具有嵌入式无线耳机的智能手表及信息播报方法
CN112291678A (zh) * 2020-04-03 2021-01-29 南京西觉硕信息科技有限公司 一种音频设备

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10244298B1 (en) * 2012-04-30 2019-03-26 Piearcings, Llc Wearable wireless audio device
CN204231644U (zh) * 2014-12-15 2015-03-25 青岛歌尔声学科技有限公司 可对无线耳机收纳和充电的可穿戴电子设备
WO2018112689A1 (zh) * 2016-12-19 2018-06-28 华为技术有限公司 一种具有蓝牙耳机的可穿戴设备
CN209001947U (zh) * 2018-12-19 2019-06-18 邓富城 一种可穿戴智能语音助手装置
CN109688504A (zh) * 2019-01-22 2019-04-26 歌尔科技有限公司 一种无线耳机的充电盒、健康监测方法和装置
CN111736451A (zh) * 2019-03-25 2020-10-02 深圳傲智天下信息科技有限公司 具有嵌入式无线耳机的智能手表及信息播报方法
CN112291678A (zh) * 2020-04-03 2021-01-29 南京西觉硕信息科技有限公司 一种音频设备

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3169081B1 (en) Wireless earbuds and related methods
US20200021904A1 (en) Wireless in-ear headphones
US20170295421A1 (en) Wireless earphone set
CN103442168B (zh) 控制终端摄像头的外部设备及其系统和方法
EP2556869A1 (en) Operable toy
EP4177668A1 (en) Wearable apparatus
EP3087758B1 (en) System and method for data transmission and power supply capability over an audio jack for mobile devices
US11717219B2 (en) Biological information measuring apparatus and biological information measuring system
JP7473673B2 (ja) 音響入出力装置
CN104618831A (zh) 无线智能耳机
US9986323B2 (en) Earphones with attachable expansion pack
WO2017206461A1 (zh) 一种耳机式心电监护器
CN110801080A (zh) 一种具有杀菌消毒和投影功能的手环
CN210019326U (zh) 入耳式脑电采集装置
WO2022174716A1 (zh) 一种无线音频设备组件、通信方法及装置
WO2023185665A1 (zh) 一种智能眼镜套件以及智能眼镜
CN114979905B (zh) 一种无线音频设备组件、通信方法及装置
CN111785554A (zh) 可穿戴设备及其控制方法和控制装置、可读存储介质
CN109361727B (zh) 信息共享方法、装置、存储介质及穿戴式设备
CN218006490U (zh) 具有耳机的眼镜与音源装置
CN215899634U (zh) 睡眠监测设备
CN210225683U (zh) 一种无线耳机、无线耳机充电盒及无线耳机充电装置
CN113712588A (zh) 一种便携式多场景应用电子听诊器
JP3117739U (ja) 首ぶら下げ式イヤホン装置
WO2019238037A1 (zh) 手持控制装置和多功能眼镜

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22755489

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22755489

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1